Dethleffs

Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Motorhome Dethleffs - Free user manual and instructions

Find the device manual for free Motorhome Premium Class (2010) Dethleffs in PDF.

📄 220 pages English EN Download 💬 AI Question 10 questions ⚙️ Specs
Notice Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - page 7
Pick your language and provide your email: we'll send you a specifically translated version.
Product Type Motorhome
Brand Dethleffs
Model Premium Class (2010)
Year 2010
Overall Length Approx. 7.5 m (24.6 ft)
Overall Width Approx. 2.3 m (7.5 ft)
Overall Height Approx. 3.0 m (9.8 ft)
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) 4,500 kg (9,920 lbs)
Payload Capacity Approx. 800 kg (1,764 lbs)
Fuel Type Diesel
Engine 3.0L Turbo Diesel (approx. 160 hp)
Transmission 6-speed Manual or 6-speed Automatic
Sleeping Capacity 4-6 persons
Fresh Water Tank 120 L (31.7 gal)
Waste Water Tank 90 L (23.8 gal)
Propane Tank Capacity 2x 11 kg (24.3 lbs)
Electrical System 12V DC / 230V AC with 100 Ah house battery
Refrigerator 132 L (4.7 cu ft) compressor fridge
Furnace Gas forced-air furnace 6 kW
Air Conditioning Roof-mounted 2.7 kW A/C
Awning Manual roll-out awning (approx. 4.5 m)
Safety Equipment Smoke detector, CO detector, LP gas detector, fire extinguisher
Spare Parts Availability Available from Dethleffs dealers and online

Frequently Asked Questions - Motorhome Premium Class (2010) Dethleffs

What type of fuel does the Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) use?
The motorhome is powered by diesel fuel, with a typical 3.0L turbo diesel engine.
How do I winterize the water system?
Drain all fresh and waste water tanks. Use potable water antifreeze in the fresh water system. Run the pump until antifreeze comes out of all faucets. Also pour antifreeze down drains and toilets.
What is the sleeping capacity?
The Premium Class (2010) can accommodate 4 to 6 persons depending on floorplan, with a cab-over bed, rear bed, and convertible dinette.
How do I maintain the battery?
Check water level in lead-acid house batteries monthly (if applicable). Keep terminals clean. Use a smart charger when connected to shore power. Disconnect battery during storage.
What should I do if the propane detector alarms?
Immediately evacuate the vehicle. Turn off propane at the tank. Do not use electrical switches. Ventilate by opening doors and windows. Have the system inspected by a professional.
How do I level the motorhome?
Use leveling blocks under the wheels or built-in hydraulic leveling jacks (if equipped). Place a bubble level inside to check.
What is the fresh water tank capacity?
The fresh water tank holds approximately 120 liters (31.7 gallons).
How often should I service the generator?
Service the generator every 100 hours or annually. Change oil, air filter, and spark plug. Refer to generator manual.
Can I replace parts myself?
Basic parts like fuses, light bulbs, and water filters can be replaced by the owner. For engine, transmission, or major systems, consult a certified technician.
What is the recommended tire pressure?
Front tires: 65 psi (4.5 bar); Rear tires: 75 psi (5.2 bar). Check the sticker on the driver's door jamb for exact values.

User questions about Motorhome Premium Class (2010) Dethleffs

0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.

Ask a new question about this device

The email remains private: it is only used to notify you if someone responds to your question.

No questions yet. Be the first to ask one.

Download the instructions for your Motorhome in PDF format for free! Find your manual Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Dethleffs and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. Motorhome Premium Class (2010) by Dethleffs.

USER MANUAL Motorhome Premium Class (2010) Dethleffs

We congratulate you on your new motorhome and would like to thank you for choosing a quality product from Dethleffs.

Whether you want to enjoy your holidays on good or bad roads, whether you want to have your "holiday home" out in the country, at the seaside or in the mountains: Your Dethleffs motorhome will always make sure that you can enjoy your holidays because the Dethleffs team has been building caravans for more than seventy years and knows what is important. This experience shows itself in the well thought-out, cosy and yet highly functional equipment as well as in the outstanding driving characteristics.

Each Dethleffs vehicle is manufactured with great care and the quality is closely checked. This ensures that our products have a long service life. In view of these strict requirements, we guarantee top quality of our products and grant you a six year leakage guarantee of the body in accordance with our guarantee conditions (see section 1.2).

This instruction manual deals primarily with the body of your motorhome. It will give you all important information and tips so that you can enjoy all technical advantages of your Dethleffs motorhome to the full. We have also included a chapter on maintenance – and thus on the conservation of value.

In addition, you will find the documents on the base vehicle and the various built-in appliances.

For maintenance work or whenever you need some help, please always get in touch with your authorised specialist workshop. They know your motorhome best of all, and will meet all your requests fast and reliably.

We wish you a lot of fun with your motorhome, a relaxing holiday and safe driving at all times.

Your Dethleffs team

1.1 Guarantee certificate....7

1.2 Guarantee conditions ..... 7

1.3 Inspection records....9

1.4 Inspection plan for annual inspection 12

1.5 Inspection plan for water ingress test .... 12

2 l n t r o

2.1 General 16

2.2 Environmental tips.... 16

3 S a f e t

3.1 Fire prevention 19

3.1.1 Avoidance of fire risks.... 19

3.1.2 Fire-fighting 19

3.1.3 In case of fire. 19

3.2 General 20

3.3 Road safety.... 20

3.4 Towing.... 22

3.5 Gas system.... 22

3.5.1 General instructions 22

3.5.2 Gas bottles 23

3.6 Electrical system 24

3.7 Water system 24

4 Before the journey ..... 25

4.1 Keys 25

4.2 Registration.... 25

4.3 Payload 26

4.3.1 Terms 26

4.3.2 Calculating the payload.... 28

4.3.3 Loading the vehicle correctly.....29

4.3.4 Roof load.... 31

4.3.5 Rear garage 32

4.3.6 Double floor.... 33

4.3.7 Sliding drawer 33

4.3.8 Bike rack 33

4.4 Towing.... 34

4.5 Entrance step 34

4.6 PVC-floor covering 36

4.7 Television 36

4.8 Sink cover 37

4.9 Roman shades for driver's window and front passenger's window ..... 38

4.10 Central locking system for kitchen unit 38

4.11 Snow chains 39

4.12 Road safety.... 39

5 During the journey ..... 41

5.1 Driving the motorhome 41

5.2 Reversing camera. 42

5.3 Driving speed 42

5.4 Brakes.... 42

5.5 Seat belts....43

5.5.1 Fastening the seat belt correctly ..... 43

5.6 Driver's seat and front passenger's seat 43

5.7 Headrests 46

5.8 Seating arrangement ..... 46

5.9 Electrically adjustable external mirrors 47

5.10 Sun visors 47

d5.11 Pneumatic spong....t....i....48o n

5.11.1 Pneumatic spring (Goldschmidt) ..... 48

5.11.2 Pneumatic spring (VB-air suspension) 49

5.12 Bonnet 19.51

5.13 Filling with washer fluid 52

5.14 Refilling cooling water ..... 52

5.15 Filling up with diesel....53

6 Pitching the motorhome.....55

6.1 Handbrake 55

6.2 Entrance step....55

6.3 Wheel chocks 55

6.4 Supports 55

6.4.1 General instructions....55

6.4.2 Steady legs 56

6.4.3 Electrical steady legs 56

6.4.4 Electrical-hydraulic steady legs ..... 58

6.5 240 V connection....60

6.6 Awning 60

7 L i v i n g

7.1 Doors 63

7.1.1 Conversion door, outside. 64

7.1.2 Conversion door, outside (Hartal) .... 64

7.1.3 Conversion door, inside ..... 65

7.1.4 Conversion door, inside (Hartal) ..... 65

7.1.5 Window conversion door ..... 65

7.1.6 Window of conversion door (Hartal) 66

7.1.7 Folding insect screen on the conversion door 66

7.2 External flaps....67

7.2.1 Flap lock with recessed handle ..... 67

7.2.2 Flap lock with separate locking cylinder 68

7.2.3 Sliding drawer 69

7.3 Driver's cabin partition ..... 69

7.4 Ventilation 70

7.5 Windows 70

7.5.1 Hinged window with automatic hinges (with safety knob)....71

7.5.2 Sliding window with lock ..... 72

7.5.3 Sliding window without lock ..... 73

7.5.4 Gathered blinds 73

7.5.5 Blind and insect screen ..... 73

7.5.6 Roman shade and insect screen ..... 74

7.5.7 Blind for the windscreen....75

7.5.8 Roman shades for driver's window and front passenger's window ..... 76

7.6 Skylights....76

7.6.1 Skylight with snap latch ..... 77

7.6.2 Hinged skylight....78

7.6.3 Heki skylight (mini and midi) ..... 79

7.6.4 Wind-up skylight 80

7.7 Rotating seats 81

7.8 Tables 81

7.8.1 Suspension table with folding table-top extension....81

7.8.2 Fixed table (movable table-top) ..... 82

7.9 Central locking system for kitchen unit....82

7.10 Television....83

7.11 Lamps 84

7.12 Light switch 85

7.13 Light control 86

7.14 Remote control for awning light, canopy light and entrance step ..... 86

7.15 Extending the seating group ..... 87

7.15.1 Extending the central seating group 87

7.15.2 Extending the central seating group with divan ..... 88

7.16 Beds....88

7.16.1 Overcab bed 88

7.16.2 Pull-down bed, electronically lowerable ..... 89

7.16.3 Fixed bed (gas-pressure springs) .... 91

7.17 Converting seating groups for sleeping 92

7.17.1 Central seating group....92

7.17.2 Central seating group with extension 93

7.17.3 Central seating group with divan ..... 94

8 Gas system....95

8.1 General 95

8.2 Gas bottles....96

8.3 Gas consumption....97

8.4 Changing gas bottles ..... 97

8.5 Gas isolator taps ..... 98

8.6 Hose break guard (crash protection unit) ..... 98

8.7 External gas connection ..... 99

8.8 Duomatic switching facility.....100

8.9 DuoControl switching facility ..... 102

9 Electrical system....105

9.1 General safety instructions ..... 105

9.2 Terms.....105

9.3 12 V power supply ..... 106

9.3.1 Living area battery ..... 106

9.4 Charging the living area battery and starter battery .....107

9.4.1 Charging using a 240 V power supply ....108

9.4.2 Charging using the vehicle engine . . .108

9.4.3 Charging with an external charger . . .108

9.5 AC converter.....109

9.6 Auxiliary charging unit .....110

9.7 Transformer/rectifier (EBL 220) .....110

9.7.1 Battery separation .....112

9.7.2 Battery selector switch .....112

9.7.3 Battery monitor .....112

9.7.4 Charging the battery.....113

9.8 Panel MP 20-T .....113

9.8.1 240 V indicator lamp.....114

9.8.2 12 V main switch .....114

9.8.3 Batteries gauge .....115

9.8.4 Tank gauge....117

9.8.5 Alarms 117

9.8.6 Temperature display.....118

9.8.7 Clock gauge .....118

9.8.8 Switch for tank heater.....118

9.9 240 V power supply .....118

9.9.1 240 V connection .....119

9.9.2 Power cable for external 240 V connection .....119

9.10 Fuses 120

9.10.1 12 V fuses....120

9.10.2 240 V fuse .....122

10 Appliances....123

10.1 General....123

10.2 Alde hot-water heater .....124

10.2.1 Alde heat exchanger.....126

10.2.2 Alde auxiliary circulating pump .....127

10.2.3 Setting the rotational speed of the circulating pump .....127

10.3 Independent vehicle heater .....128

10.4 Alde boiler....129

10.4.1 Switching the boiler on/off .....129

10.4.2 Filling/emptying the boiler.....129

10.5 Cooker....130

10.5.1 Gas cooker....130

10.5.2 Gas oven 131

10.5.3 Microwave oven ..... 132

10.5.4 Extractor hood .....133

10.6 Refrigerator....134

10.6.1 Refrigerator ventilation grill.....134

10.6.2 Operation (Dometic 7 series with automatic power selection and frame heater).....134

10.6.3 Operation (Kissmann)....137

10.6.4 Refrigerator door locking mechanism....138

10.7 Air conditioning unit .....139

10.8 Dishwasher....141

10.9 Central vacuum cleaner .....142

11 Sanitary fittings .... 145

11.1 Water supply, general.... 145

11.2 Water tank.... 146

11.2.1 Drinking water filler neck with cap.... 146

11.2.2 Water drainage 147

11.2.3 Filling with water 147

11.2.4 Draining water.... 147

11.3 Waste water tank 148

11.4 Odour seal.... 149

11.5 Filling the water system..... 149

11.6 Emptying the water system..... 150

11.7 Toilet compartment 151

11.8 Toilet 151

11.8.1 Swivel toilet 152

11.8.2 Vacuum toilet (Dometic) 152

11.8.3 Removing the cassette ..... 153

11.8.4 Emptying the cassette.... 154

12 Care.... 155

12.1 External care.... 155

12.1.1 Washing with a high-pressure cleaner 155

12.1.2 Washing the vehicle 155

12.1.3 Windows of acrylic glass.... 156

12.1.4 Underbody.... 156

12.1.5 Waste water tank 156

12.1.6 Entrance step 156

12.1.7 Driver's cabin insulation mat (model I) 157

12.1.8 Electrical-hydraulic steady legs..... 157

12.2 Interior care.... 157

12.3 Water system 158

12.3.1 Cleaning the water tank ..... 158

12.3.2 Cleaning the water pipes..... 159

12.3.3 Disinfecting the water system ..... 159

12.4 Extractor hood.... 160

12.5 Vacuum toilet (Dometic) 160

12.6 Winter care 161

12.6.1 Preparations ..... 161

12.6.2 Winter operation 162

12.6.3 At the end of the winter season.... 162

12.7 Lay-up 162

12.7.1 Temporary lay-up 162

12.7.2 Winter lay-up. 164

12.7.3 Starting up the vehicle after a temporary lay-up or after lay-up over winter 165

13 Maintenance 167

13.1 Inspection work 167

13.2 Maintenance work.... 167

13.3 Electrical-hydraulic steady legs..... 168

13.4 Alde hot-water heater 168

13.4.1 Checking the fluid level ..... 168

13.4.2 Topping up heating fluid ..... 169

13.4.3 Bleeding the heating system..... 169

13.5 Independent vehicle heater ..... 169

13.6 Air conditioning unit (Truma) ..... 169

13.7 Central vacuum cleaner....170

13.8 Replacing bulbs and fluorescent tubes ..... 171

13.8.1 Halogen spotlight (movable) ..... 171

13.8.2 Room lamp 172

13.8.3 Recessed halogen light with housing.... 172

13.8.4 Recessed halogen light (swivelling).... 173

13.8.5 Recessed halogen light (flat) ..... 173

13.8.6 Wardrobe light 174

13.8.7 Garage light 174

13.8.8 Refrigerator light 175

13.9 Spare parts 175

13.10 Vehicle identification plate ..... 176

13.11 Warning and information stickers ... 176

14 Wheels and tyres ..... 177

14.1 General 177

14.2 Tyre selection 178

14.3 Tyre specifications.... 179

14.4 Handling of tyres 179

14.5 Changing wheels 179

14.6 Spare wheel support ..... 180

14.7 Tyre pressure....181

15 Troubleshooting.....183

15.1 Braking system 183

15.2 Pneumatic spring....183

15.2.1 Pneumatic spring (Goldschmidt) .... 183

15.2.2 Pneumatic spring (VB-air suspension) ..... 184

15.3 Electrical-hydraulic steady legs ..... 185

15.4 Electrical system ..... 185

15.5 Light control 187

15.6 Gas system 188

15.7 Cooker 189

15.7.1 Gas cooker/gas oven.....189

15.7.2 Microwave oven.... 189

15.8 Heater/boiler 189

15.9 Refrigerator 190

15.9.1 Refrigerator with AES 190

15.9.2 Kissmann refrigerator ..... 191

15.10 Air conditioning unit ..... 192

15.11 Dishwasher 192

15.12 Water supply ..... 193

15.13 Vacuum toilet (Dometic) ..... 194

15.14 Body....195

16 Special equipment....197

16.1 Weight details for special equipment ..... 197

17 Helpful notes....199

17.1 Traffic rules in foreign countries.....199
17.2 Help on Europe's roads ..... 199
17.3 Speed limits and permissible dimensions ..... 201
17.4 Driving with low beam in European countries 204
17.5 Sleeping in the vehicle away from camping areas ..... 204
17.6 Gas supply in European countries ..... 206
17.7 Toll regulations in European countries ..... 206
17.8 Tips on staying overnight safely during travel....206
17.9 Tips for winter campers ..... 207
17.10 Travel checklists ..... 207

1.1 Guarantee certificate

Vehicle data

Model:

Car manufacturer/type of engine:

Serial number:

Initial registration:

Purchased from company:

Expiry of the guarantee period:

Key number:

Chassis number:

Customer Address

Surname, Christian name:

Street, No.:

Postal code, town:

Dealer's stamp and signature

We reserve the right to alter the construction, equipment and the scope of delivery. Special equipment is also listed that is not included in the standard scope of delivery. The descriptions and illustrations in this brochure do not relate to a particular version. For all details, only the respective equipment list is valid.

1.2 Guarantee conditions

  1. In addition to the legal guarantee and product warranty rights due to the customer, Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG may also grant a guarantee of six years that the vehicles constructed by the company are sealed in such a manner that moisture cannot penetrate from the outside into the interior of the vehicle.

The guarantee obligations do not apply if the leakage is a result of improper handling of the windows, doors and skylights or damage that has not been properly repaired. Damage that is caused by forces of nature (e.g. flooding) is not covered by the guarantee. The guarantee extensions include only the correct repair work. Conversion or diminution as well as travelling expenses or other indirect costs are not covered by the guarantee.

  1. When dealing with a case of leakage covered under the conditions of this guarantee, Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG is obliged to rectify the defective vehicle part concerned by repairing it free of charge or replacing the part, depending on what is necessary to immediately to repair the damage.

Defects are to be rectified by Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG or by an authorised specialist workshop in accordance with the guidelines of Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG.

  1. The prerequisite for this guarantee is that the vehicle must be presented once a year to an authorised specialist workshop for an inspection. The presentation must take place 2 months at the latest after the anniversary of the initial registration (or delivery).

If the inspection is not carried out according to schedule, this will nullify your warranty. It cannot be renewed by carrying out an inspection at a later time. As proof that the inspection has been completed, there are designated coupons in the Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG guarantee booklet where inspection stamps are to be glued and endorsed by a stamp, the date and the signature of a respective Dethleffs dealer.

  1. The guarantee begins on the day of the initial registration or delivery of the vehicle to the customer, 1 year at the latest after delivery to the dealer, and is valid while the vehicle is in use, for 6 years at the longest. If initial registration of the vehicle precedes taking delivery, the warranty commences on the vehicle's initial registration date (warranty qualifying date). A change of ownership of the purchased object has no effect on the guarantee obligations. The guarantee expires if the terms outlined in paragraph 3 are not complied with. The performance of guarantee work does not increase the guarantee period.

  2. Parts installed to rectify faults are also guaranteed under the terms of the guarantee until the guarantee period expires.

  3. If leakage occurs, the owner must notify Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG or a Dethleffs dealer of this in writing within 15 days of its detection. The guarantee certificate and the corresponding guarantee stamps must be included with the notification. If notification of leakage does not occur within the time limit stated, no claims can be made under the terms of the guarantee.

Remedying of leakage will take place after approval has been given by Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG.

If no agreement is reached about the type, extent and result of the repairs, Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG or the Dethleffs dealer will consult a neutral expert whose decision is binding for all parties involved.

  1. The costs of the inspection are to be paid by the party covered by the guarantee.

  2. As far as legally permissible, the court responsible for Isny will be agreed upon as the venue for jurisdiction.

1.3 Inspection records

Delivery

Date:

Signature and stamp of the Dethleffs dealer:

1st year Water ingress test

Date:

Signature and stamp of the Dethleffs dealer:

Paste inspection stamp here.

○ Water ingress test 1st year

○ Water ingress test 1st year

○ No defects found

○ Found defects:

Should it be determined during an inspection that additional work is necessary, then the carrying out of this work is dependent on the customer commissioning this to be done. Please also adhere to the service intervals stipulated by the manufacturers of the individual equipment. Information is included in the service documents enclosed.

2nd year Water ingress test

Date:

Signature and stamp of the Dethleffs dealer:

Paste inspection stamp here.

○ Water ingress test 2nd year
○ Water ingress test 2nd year

○ No defects found
○ Found defects:

3rd year Water ingress test

Date:

Signature and stamp of the Dethleffs dealer:

Paste inspection stamp here.

○ Water ingress test 3rd year
○ Water ingress test 3rd year

○ No defects found
○ Found defects:

Should it be determined during an inspection that additional work is necessary, then the carrying out of this work is dependent on the customer commissioning this to be done. Please also adhere to the service intervals stipulated by the manufacturers of the individual equipment. Information is included in the service documents enclosed.

4th year Water ingress test

Date:

Signature and stamp of the Dethleffs dealer:

Paste inspection stamp here.

Water ingress test 4th year
Water ingress test 4th year
○ No defects found
○ Found defects:

5th year Water ingress test

Date:

Signature and stamp of the Dethleffs dealer:

Paste inspection stamp here.

○ Water ingress test 5th year
Water ingress test 5th year
○ No defects found
○ Found defects:

Should it be determined during an inspection that additional work is necessary, then the carrying out of this work is dependent on the customer commissioning this to be done. Please also adhere to the service intervals stipulated by the manufacturers of the individual equipment. Information is included in the service documents enclosed.

1.4 Inspection plan for annual inspection

Pos.Component Activity Interval
1Auxiliary support Lubrication Annually
2Joints, hinges Lubrication Annually
3Refrigerator, heater, boiler, cooker, lighting, storage flap and door closures, toilet, seat beltsFunction check Annually
4Windows, skylights Function check, water ingress testAnnually
5Upholstery, curtains, blindsVisual checkAnnually
6Sealing strips, edges, rubberCheck for damageAnnually
7Water supplyWater ingress testAnnually
8Hot-air systemFunction check, clean fan wheel as necessaryAnnually
9Underbody protection, floor skirt attachmentVisual check Annually
10Electrical systemFunction checkAnnually
11Gas systemOfficial gas inspectionEvery two years
12Connections between the chassis and bodyCheckEvery two years
13UnderbodyVisual check, repair underbody protection as necessaryEvery two years

We reserve the right to modify the inspection plan.

1.5 Inspection plan for water ingress test

Pos.ComponentActivity
1.1Wheel housingVisual check
1.2Rear wall floor plateau connectionVisual check
1.2.1Side wall in the direction of travel left connectionVisual check
1.2.2Side wall in the direction of travel right connec-tionVisual check
1.3Front wall floor plateau connectionVisual check
1.3.1Side wall in the direction of travel left connectionVisual check
1.3.2Side wall in the direction of travel right connec-tionVisual check
1.4Side wall floor plateau right connectionVisual check
1.5Side wall floor plateau left connectionVisual check
1.6Connection to driver's cabinVisual check
1.7Base frame with base frame cut-outsVisual check
1.8Check the status of the outer metal sheetsVisual check
Pos.Component Activity
1.9Check the status of the window rubbers, expansion joints, sealing jointsVisual check
2.1Measure the floor plateau at this connection point with a moisture measuring device, write down the corresponding values with the date of the assessment. Prescribed maximum values – up to 20 % normal.If the values are above 20 % check if it is due to accumulated condensation.Measuring
2.2Measure inside the vehicle (walls, window sections, roof, etc.), note changes in the colour of the decor. Prescribed maximum values – up to 20 % normal.If the values are above 20 % check if it is due to accumulated condensation.Measuring
3.1Wheel housing Spray with Dethleffsspecial weatherproof solution
3.2Rear wall floor plateau connection Spray with Dethleffsspecial weatherproof solution
3.3Front wall floor plateau connectionSpray with Dethleffs special weatherproof solution
3.4Side wall floor plateau right connectionSpray with Dethleffs special weatherproof solution
3.5Side wall floor plateau left connectionSpray with Dethleffs special weatherproof solution

We reserve the right to modify the inspection plan.

Please read this instruction manual completely before using the vehicle for the first time!

Always keep this instruction manual in the vehicle. Also inform all other users of the safety regulations.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Please read this instruction manual completely before using the vehicle for the first time! - 1

The non-observance of this symbol can lead to personal injury.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Please read this instruction manual completely before using the vehicle for the first time! - 2

The non-observance of this symbol can lead to damage being caused to, or inside the vehicle.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Please read this instruction manual completely before using the vehicle for the first time! - 3

This symbol indicates recommendations or special aspects.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Please read this instruction manual completely before using the vehicle for the first time! - 4

This symbol indicates actions which lead to environmental awareness.

With your Dethleffs motorhome you will receive a file with the following vehicle manuals and documents:

Dethleffs documents

Additional documents

  • Instruction manual and service book (housing body)
    • List of Dethleffs dealers
  • Operating and installation instructions of various appliances
  • Complete set of documents from the chassis manufacturer
    ● Test certificate for the gas system in accordance with German regulations

This instruction manual contains sections which describe model-specific equipment or special equipment. These sections are not specially marked. It may be that your vehicle has not been fitted with this special equipment. In some cases, the actual equipment of your vehicle may therefore be different from that shown in some illustrations and descriptions.

However, your vehicle may be fitted with other special equipment not described in this instruction manual.

Special equipment is described when an explanation is required.

Adhere to the instruction manuals which are separately enclosed.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Additional documents - 1

The details "right", "left", "front" and "rear" always refer to the vehicle in direction of travel.
All dimensions and weight details are "approximate".
The metric specifications are binding for physical dimensions.

Should the vehicle be subjected to damage due to a failure to follow the instructions in this instruction manual, then the guarantee claim is deemed invalid.

Our vehicles are subjected to continuous development. Please understand that we reserve the right to alter the form, equipment and technology. Therefore, no claims can be made against the manufacturer as a result of the contents of this instruction manual. The equipment which was known and included at the time of going to press is described.

The reprinting, translation and copying, including extracts is not permitted without prior written authorisation from the manufacturer.

2.1 General

The vehicle is constructed in accordance with the latest technology and the recognised safety regulations. Nevertheless, personal injury may result and the vehicle may be damaged if the safety instructions in this instruction manual are not followed.

Only use the vehicle in a technically impeccable condition. Follow the instructions in the instruction manual.

Malfunctions which impair the safety of persons or the vehicle should be immediately remedied by qualified personnel. To avoid further damages, observe the duty to avert, minimize or mitigate loss for the user during faults.

Have the vehicle's braking and gas systems inspected and repaired by an authorised specialist workshop only.

Alterations to the body are only to be carried out with the authorisation of the manufacturer.

The vehicle is designed for the exclusive transport of persons. Luggage and accessories may only be transported up to the maximum permissible gross weight.

Observe the test and inspection periods stipulated by the manufacturer.

2.2 Environmental tips

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Environmental tips - 1

▷ Be considerate of the environment.
Remember that: All kinds of waste water and household waste are not to be disposed of in drains or in the open countryside.
On board, collect waste water only in the waste water tank or – if necessary – in other containers designed for that purpose.
Only empty the waste water tank and toilet cassette or sewage tank at disposal stations at the camping or caravan sites, which are especially provided for this purpose. When stopping in towns and communities, observe the instructions at caravan sites or ask where there are disposal stations.
▷ Empty waste water tank as often as possible, even when it is not completely full (hygiene).
If possible, flush out waste water tank and, if necessary, drainage pipe with fresh water every time it is emptied.
▷ Never allow the toilet cassette or sewage tank to become too full. Empty the toilet cassette or sewage tank frequently, at the latest as soon as the level indicator lights up.
Separate household waste according to glass, tin cans, plastic and wet waste also when on a journey. Enquire at the town or community authority about disposal points. Household waste is not to be disposed of in waste paper baskets which are situated at car parks.
Empty waste bins as often as possible into the containers provided for this purpose. This helps to avoid unpleasant smells and an accumulation of rubbish on board.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Environmental tips - 2

When parked, do not allow the engine to run more than necessary. When running idle, a cold engine releases more contaminants than usual. The running temperature of the engine is achieved more quickly whilst the vehicle is in motion.
Use an environmentally-friendly WC chemical agent for the WC which can also be biologically degraded and only use small doses.
When staying in towns and communities for long periods, search for parking areas which are specially reserved for motorhomes. Enquire at the town or community authority about parking spaces.
▶ Always leave the parking places in a clean condition.

Chapter overview

This chapter contains important safety instructions. The safety instructions are for the protection of persons and property.

The instructions address the following topics:

● fire prevention and what to do in case of fire
- general care of the vehicle
• road safety of the vehicle
- towing
• gas system of the vehicle
• electrical system of the vehicle
● water system of the vehicle

3.1 Fire prevention

3.1.1 Avoidance of fire risks

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Avoidance of fire risks - 1

▶ Never leave children in the vehicle unattended.
▶ Keep flammable materials clear of heating and cooking appliances.
▶ Lights can get very hot. When the light is switched on, there must always be a safety distance of 30 cm between light and flammable objects. Fire hazard!
▶ Never use portable heating or cooking appliances.
▶ Only authorised qualified personnel may make changes to the electrical system, gas system or appliances.

3.1.2 Fire-fighting

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Fire-fighting - 1

▶ Always carry a dry powder fire extinguisher in the vehicle. The fire extinguisher must be approved, tested and close at hand.
The fire extinguisher is not included in the scope of delivery.
▶ Have the fire extinguisher tested at regular intervals by authorised qualified personnel. Observe the date of testing.
▶ Always keep a fire blanket near the cooker.

3.1.3 In case of fire

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - In case of fire - 1

▶ Evacuate all passengers.
▶ Cut off the electrical power supply and disconnect from the mains.
▶ Close regulator tap on the gas bottle.
▶ Sound the alarm and call the fire brigade.
▶ Fight the fire if this is possible without risk.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - In case of fire - 2

Acquaint yourself with the position and operation of the emergency exits.
▷ Keep escape routes clear.
Observe the fire extinguisher instructions for use.

All windows and doors which meet the following requirements are considered as emergency exits:

  • Open to the outside or can be shifted in horizontal direction
  • Opening angle at least 70^
    ● Minimum diameter of clearance = 450 mm
    ● Maximum distance from the vehicle floor = 950 mm

3.2 General

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - General - 1

The oxygen in the vehicle interior is used up by breathing and the use of gas operated appliances. That is why the oxygen needs to be replaced on a constant basis. For this purpose, forced ventilation options (e.g. skylights with forced ventilation, mushroom-shaped vents or floor vents) are fitted to the vehicle. Never cover or block forced ventilations from the inside or outside with objects such as e.g. a winter mat. Keep forced ventilations clear of snow and leaves. There is a danger of suffocation due to increased CO_2 levels.
▶ Observe the headroom of the doors.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - General - 2

As far as the fitted appliances (heater, cooker, refrigerator, etc.) and the base vehicle (engine, brakes, etc.) are concerned, the instruction manuals are authoritative. It is imperative that they be observed.
Fitting accessories or special equipment can alter the dimensions, weight and road behaviour of the vehicle. Some of the parts must be entered in the vehicle papers.
Only use wheel rims and tyres which are approved for the vehicle. Information concerning the size of the approved wheel rims and tyres is included in the vehicle documents or can be obtained from authorised dealers and service centres.
▶ Firmly apply the handbrake when parking the vehicle.
If the maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle exceeds 4 tonnes, wheel chocks must be used when parking on gradients. The wheel chocks are provided as standard for vehicles with a maximum permissible gross weight exceeding 4 tonnes.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - General - 3

When leaving the vehicle, it is imperative that all doors, external flaps and windows are closed.
Carry a hazard warning triangle and a first-aid kit and/or flashing hazard warning light when this is required by law.
The vehicle may only be driven by drivers who hold a driving licence which is valid for the respective vehicle class.
▷ When selling the vehicle, hand over all instruction manuals for the vehicle and the fitted appliances.

3.3 Road safety

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Road safety - 1

Before commencing the journey, carry out a functional check of indicating and lighting equipment, the steering and the brakes.
If the vehicle has been stationary for a long period (approx. 10 months) have the braking and gas systems checked by an authorised specialist workshop.
▶ Before commencing the journey and after short interruptions of the journey, ensure that the entrance step is completely retracted.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Road safety - 2

Before commencing the journey, open, lock and secure the shades situated on the windscreen and on the driver's and front passenger's windows.
Before commencing the journey, remove the television from the support and store it securely.
Before commencing the journey, place and secure the flat screen and screen support in the initial position. If the screen holder is installed in a TV cabinet: Close TV cabinet.
Before commencing the journey, take off the loose sink and drain basin covers and store them securely in the kitchen unit or the wardrobe.
Before commencing the journey, rotate all swivel seats in the direction of travel and lock in position. During the journey, the swivel seats must remain locked in place in the direction of travel.
During the journey, persons are only to sit on the permitted seats (see chapter 5). The authorised number of seats is stipulated in the vehicle documents.
▶ Seat belts must be worn by all passengers.
▶ Fasten your seat belts before the beginning of the journey and keep them fastened during the journey.
It is not permitted to stay in the alcove during the journey.
▶ Always secure children with the children safety equipment prescribed for the respective height and weight.
▶ Factory-set three-point safety belts must be used when attaching child restraint systems.
The base vehicle is a commercial vehicle (small truck). Adjust your driving technique accordingly.
In case of underpasses, tunnels or similar obstacles, note the total height of the vehicle (including the roof load).
In winter, the roof must be free of snow and ice before commencing the journey.
▶ Check tyre pressure before a journey or every 2 weeks. Wrong tyre pressure causes excessive wear and can lead to damage or even to tyre burst. You can lose control of the vehicle.
▶ Do not operate the independent vehicle heater at petrol stations. Danger of explosion!
▶ Do not operate the independent vehicle heater in closed spaces. Danger of suffocation!

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Road safety - 3

Before commencing the journey, distribute the payload evenly within the vehicle (see chapter 4).
When loading the vehicle and when taking a rest from driving, in order to load luggage or food, for example, observe the maximum permissible gross weight and axle loads (refer to vehicle documents).
Before commencing the journey, ensure that all cupboard doors, the toilet compartment door and all drawers and flaps are secure. Engage the refrigerator door securing device.
Before commencing the journey, close windows and skylights.
Before commencing the journey, close all external flaps and lock them.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Road safety - 4

Before commencing the journey, remove the external supports and retract the corner steadies or steady legs, which are fitted to the vehicle.
Before commencing the journey, put the antenna in park position.
During the initial journey and each time after changing a wheel, re-tighten the wheel bolts/wheel nuts after 50 km (30 miles). Subsequently inspect them at regular intervals in order to ensure that they are firmly seated.
- Tyres may not be older than 6 years as the material becomes brittle over time (see chapter 14).
When using snow chains, the tyres, wheel suspension and steering are subjected to an additional load. When using snow chains, drive slowly (maximum speed 50 km/h) and only on streets which are completely covered with snow. Otherwise the vehicle could be damaged.

3.4 Towing

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Towing - 1

▶ Care is to be taken when connecting and detaching a trailer. Risk of accident and injury!
▶ No persons are to be between the towing vehicle and the trailer during positioning for connecting and detaching.

3.5 Gas system

3.5.1 General instructions

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - General instructions - 1

Before commencing the journey, when leaving the vehicle or when gas equipment is not in use, close all gas isolator taps and the main isolator tap on the gas bottle.
▶ No appliance operated by a naked flame (e.g. heater or refrigerator) may be in operation when filling the tank, on ferries or in the garage. Danger of explosion!
▶ Do not use appliances operated with a naked flame in closed spaces (e.g. garages). Danger of poisoning and suffocation!
▶ Only have the gas system maintained, repaired or altered by an authorised specialist workshop.
▶ Have the gas system checked by an authorised specialist workshop according to the national regulations before commissioning. This also applies for not registered vehicles. For modifications to the gas system have the gas system immediately checked by an authorised specialist workshop.
The gas pressure regulator and exhaust gas pipes must also be inspected. The gas pressure regulator has to be replaced after 10 years at the latest. The vehicle owner is responsible for seeing that this is carried out.
In case of a defect of the gas system (gas odour, high gas consumption) there is danger of explosion! Close regulator tap on the gas bottle immediately. Open doors and windows and ventilate well.
If the gas system is defective: Do not smoke; do not ignite any open flames, and do not operate electric switches (light switches etc.).
▶ Before using the cooker make sure that there is sufficient ventilation. Open windows or the skylight.
▶ Do not use the gas cooker or gas oven for heating purposes.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - General instructions - 2

If there are several gas devices, each gas device must have its own gas isolator tap. If individual gas devices are not in use, close the respective gas isolator tap.
▶ Ignition safety valves must close within 1 minute after the gas flame has extinguished. A clicking sound is audible. Check function from time to time.
The built-in gas devices are exclusively meant for use with propane or butane gas or a mixture of both. The gas pressure regulator as well as all built-in gas devices are designed for a gas pressure of 30 mbar.
▶ Propane gas is capable of gasification up to -42^ , whereas butane gas gasifies at 0^ . Below these temperatures no gas pressure is available. Butane gas is unsuitable for use in winter.
▶ Regularly inspect the gas tube fitted to the gas bottle connection for tightness. The gas tube must not have any tears and must not be porous. Have the gas tube replaced by an authorised specialist workshop no later than ten years after the manufacturing date. The operator of the gas system must see to it that the parts are replaced.
▶ Due to its function and construction, the gas bottle compartment is a space which is open to the exterior. Never cover or block up the standard forced ventilations. Otherwise gas that is emitted can not be diverted to the outside.
▶ Do not use the gas bottle compartment as storage space as it is not moisture-proof.
- Secure the gas bottle compartment against unauthorised access. To do this, lock the compartment.
The regulator tap on the gas bottle must be accessible.
▶ Only connect gas-operated devices (e.g. gas grill) which have been designed for a gas pressure of 30 mbar.
The exhaust gas pipe must be fitted tightly to the heating system and to the vent and must be sealed. The exhaust gas pipe must not show any evidence of damage.
Exhaust fumes must be able to escape into the atmosphere unhindered and fresh air must be able to enter unhindered. For this reason, keep the exhaust pipe and intake openings clean and unobstructed (e.g. free from snow and ice). For this reason, no snow walls or aprons may lie against the vehicle.

3.5.2 Gas bottles

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Gas bottles - 1

Gas bottles are only to be transported within the designated gas bottle compartment.
Place the gas bottles in vertical position in the gas bottle compartment.
▶ Fasten the gas bottles so that they are unable to turn or tilt.
▶ If the gas bottles are not connected to the gas tube, always place the protective cap on top.
▶ Close the regulator tap on the gas bottle before the gas pressure regulator or gas tube are removed from the gas bottle.
The gas pressure regulator or the gas tube must only be secured with a suitable gas spanner (Do not overtighten).

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Gas bottles - 2

▶ Only use special gas pressure regulators with a safety valve designed for vehicle use. Other gas pressure regulators are not permitted and cannot meet the demanding requirements.
▶ Use the gas pressure regulator defroster if the temperature falls below 5^ C.
▶ Use only 11 kg or 5 kg gas bottles. Camping gas bottles with built-in check valve (blue bottle with max. 2.5 or 3 kg content) are can be used in exceptional cases with a safety valve.
▶ Use the shortest possible tube lengths (150 cm max.) for external gas bottles.
▶ Never block the floor ventilation openings below the gas bottles.

3.6 Electrical system

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Electrical system - 1

▶ Only allow qualified personnel to work on the electrical system.
Prior to carrying out work on the electrical system, switch off all devices and lights, disconnect the battery and disconnect the vehicle from the mains.
▶ Only use original fuses with the stipulated values.
▶ Only replace defective fuses when the cause of the defect is known and has been remedied.
▶ Never bridge or repair fuses.

3.7 Water system

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Water system - 1

▶ Water left standing in the water tank or in the water pipes becomes undrinkable after a short period. Therefore, before each use of the vehicle, thoroughly clean the water pipes and the water tank. After each use of the vehicle completely empty the water tank and the water pipes.
In the case of lay-ups lasting more than a week disinfect the water system before using the vehicle.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Water system - 2

If the vehicle is not used for several days or if it is not heated when there is a risk of frost, empty the entire water system. Leave the water taps on in central position. Leave the safety/drainage valve (if there is one) and all drain cocks open. Frost damage to appliances, frost damage to the vehicle and deposits in water-carrying components can be avoided in this way.

Chapter overview

This chapter contains important information which has to be noted before commencing your journey or carrying out any tasks before the journey.

The instructions address the following topics:

  • keys
  • registration
    • calculating the payload
    ● correct loading of the vehicle
  • towing
    ● retracting and extending the entrance step
  • PVC-floor covering
    • storing the television
  • storing the sink cover
    ● securing the Roman shade for the driver's and passenger's windows
    • securing the drawers in the kitchen unit
    • using snow chains

At the end of the chapter there is a checklist which once again summarises the most important points.

4.1 Keys

Your vehicle comes complete with all the keys required for the vehicle. These are e.g.:

Two keys for

  • ignition lock
  • driver's and passenger's doors
  • fuel tank

Two keys for

• conversion door of the body
● drinking water filler neck
- external flaps

Always deposit a replacement key outside the vehicle. Make a note of the key number. Our authorised dealers and workshops can offer assistance in case of loss.

4.2 Registration

Your motorhome is a vehicle which must be registered. Observe national regulations on registration.

Please remember that certain countries require a separate national code sticker in addition to the EU plate.

4.3 Payload

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Payload - 1

▶ Overloading the vehicle and wrong tyre pressure can cause tyres to burst. You can lose control of the vehicle.
▶ Only the maximum permissible gross weight and the mass in a ready-to-drive condition, not the actual weight of the vehicle, is stated in the vehicle documents. For your own safety, we recommend that you have your loaded vehicle (with all passengers, luggage and personal objects) weighed on a public weighbridge before you set out on your journey.
Adapt the speed to the payload. The stopping distance is increased if the payload is high.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Payload - 2

Do not exceed the maximum permissible gross weight stated in the vehicle documents by the payload.
▶ Built-in accessories and special equipment reduce the payload.
Adhere to the axle load stated in the vehicle documents.

On loading, make sure that the payload's centre of gravity is as low as possible (directly above the floor of the vehicle). Otherwise this may affect the driving characteristics of the vehicle.

Maximum permitted payloads

Description Load (kg)
Roof racks 100
Bike rack Triple 50
Quadruple 60
Sliding drawer 40
Rear garage 200
Overcab bed 200
Pull-down bed 200
Rear bed 200

4.3.1 Terms

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Terms - 1

Technically speaking, the term "mass" has now replaced the term "weight". However, "weight" is still the term more frequent in common use. For better understanding, "mass" is therefore only used in the following sections for fixed formulations.
All specifications according to EU norm DIN EN 1646-2.

Maximum permissible gross weight in a laden condition

The maximum permissible gross weight in a laden condition is the weight that a vehicle may never exceed.

The maximum permissible overall weight in laden condition consists of the mass in ready-to-drive condition and of the payload.

In the vehicle documents, the manufacturer has specified the maximum permissible gross weight in a laden condition.

Permitted mass

The permitted mass is the weight specified by the manufacturer for issuing the type approval. The permitted mass must never exceed the maximum permissible gross weight of the loaded vehicle.

Mass in ready-to-drive condition

The mass in ready-to-drive condition is the weight of the ready-to-drive standard vehicle.

The mass in ready-to-drive condition is made up as follows:

  • Unladen weight (mass of the empty vehicle) with factory-installed standard equipment
  • Driver's weight
  • Basic equipment weight

Unladen weight includes lubricants such as oils and coolants which have been filled, the on-board tool set, the spare wheel and a fuel tank which has been filled up to 90 %.

75 kg are calculated for the weight of the driver, regardless of how much the driver really weighs.

Basic equipment includes all equipment and fluids required for safe and proper vehicle use. The weight of the basic equipment includes:

● Water system filled up to 90 % (water tank and pipes)
• Gas bottles filled up to 90 %
- A full heating system
● A full toilet flushing system
● The power cables for the 240 V power supply
- The installation kit for an auxiliary battery if an auxiliary battery can be used

The waste water and sewage tanks are empty.

Example for calculating the basic equipment

Water tank with 120 l 120 kg
Gas bottles (2 x 11 kg_gas + 2 x 14 kg_bottle ) + 50 kg
Boiler with 12 l + 12 kg
240 V power cable + 4 kg
Installation kit for auxiliary battery + 20 kg
Total = 206 kg

In the vehicle documents, the manufacturer specifies the mass in ready-to-drive conditions.

Payload The payload is made up as follows:

  • Conventional load
    • Additional equipment
  • Personal equipment

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Example for calculating the basic equipment - 1

The vehicle's payload can be increased by reducing the weight in a ready-to-drive condition. To do this, it is allowed for example to empty the fluid containers or to remove the gas bottles.

You will find explanations on the individual components of the payload in the following text.

Conventional load

The conventional load is the weight specified by the manufacturer for the passengers.

Conventional load means: 75 kg are calculated for every seat specified by the manufacturer, regardless of how much the passengers actually weigh. The driver's seat is already included as part of the mass in ready-to-drive condition and must not be calculated as part of the conventional load.

In the vehicle documents, the manufacturer specifies the number of seats.

Additional equipment

Additional equipment includes accessories and special equipment. Examples of additional equipment include:

  • Caravan coupling
  • Awning
  • Bike or motorcycle rack
  • Satellite unit

Chapter 16 lists the weights of the various items of special equipment; they may also be obtained from the manufacturer.

Personal equipment

Personal equipment includes all items in the vehicle that are not included in the conventional load or in the additional equipment. For example, personal equipment can include the following:

  • Foodstuffs
  • Crockery
  • Television
  • Radio
  • Clothes
  • Bedding
  • Toys
  • Books
  • Toiletries

No matter where kept, personal equipment also includes:

  • Animals
  • Bikes
  • Boats
  • Surfboards
  • Sports equipment

For the personal equipment, according to the applicable regulations, the manufacturer must use a minimum weight that is determined according to the following formula:

Formula Minimum weight M (kg) = 10 x N + 10 x L

Explanation

N = maximum number of people including the driver, as stated by the manufacturer

L = total length of the vehicle in metres

4.3.2 Calculating the payload

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Calculating the payload - 1

The payload calculation at the factory is partly based on all-inclusive weights. For safety reasons, the maximum permissible gross weight in a laden condition must not be exceeded.
▶ Only the maximum permissible gross weight and the mass in a ready-to-drive condition, not the actual weight of the vehicle, is stated in the vehicle documents. For your own safety, we recommend that you have your loaded vehicle (with all passengers, luggage and personal objects) weighed on a public weighbridge before you set out on your journey.

The payload (see section 4.3.1) is the difference in weight between

● Maximum permissible gross weight in a laden condition and

● Vehicle mass complete in a ready-to-drive condition.

- Maximum permissible gross weight in a laden condition and - Vehicle mass complete in a ready-to-drive condition.

Example for calculating the payload

Mass in kg to be calculatedCalculation
Maximum permissible gross weight according to vehicle documents3500
Vehicle mass in a ready-to-drive condition, including basic equipment according to vehicle documents- 3070
This results in a permissible payload of430
Conventional load e.g.: 3 persons each weighing 75 kg- 225
Additional equipment - 40
For the personal equipment this results in= 165

The calculation of the payload from the difference between the maximum permissible gross weight in laden condition and the mass specified by the manufacturer in ready-to-drive condition is however only a theoretical value.

Only if the vehicle is weighed with full tanks (fuel and water), full gas bottles and complete additional equipment on a public weighbridge, can the actual payload be determined.

To do this, proceed as follows:

■ First only drive the vehicle on to the weighbridge with the front wheels and have it weighed.
■ Then drive the vehicle on to the weighbridge with the back wheels and have it weighed.

The individual values give the current axle loads. These are important for the correct loading of the vehicle (see section 4.3.3). The sum of these values is the current weight of the vehicle.

The actual payload is the difference between the maximum permissible gross weight in laden condition and the weighed vehicle weight.

This can be used to determine the weight that remains for the personal equipment:

■ Determine the weight of the passengers and subtract it from the value for the actual payload.

The result is the weight that is permitted for the actual load of the personal equipment.

4.3.3 Loading the vehicle correctly

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Loading the vehicle correctly - 1

For safety reasons, never exceed the maximum permissible gross weight in a laden condition.
▶ Distribute the load evenly on the left and right sides of the vehicle.
▶ Distribute the load evenly on both axles. In doing so, observe the axle loads specified in the vehicle documents. Observe the permissible load-carrying capacity of the tyres (see chapter 14).

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Loading the vehicle correctly - 2

▶ Heavy loads behind the rear axle can reduce the load on the front axle due to the leverage effect (a). This applies especially to long rear extensions, if a motorbike is transported on the rear carrier or if there is a heavy load in the rear storage space. The release of the front axle negatively affects the driving quality, especially for front-driven vehicles.
▶ Store all objects in such a way that they cannot slip.
▶ Store heavy objects (awning, tin cans, etc.) close to the axles. Low-lying storage compartments whose doors do not open in the direction of travel are particularly suited for storing heavy objects.
▶ Stack light objects (laundry) in the roof storage cabinets.
▶ Load the bike rack with bicycles only (max. four units).

Large storage spaces, such as the rear garage, also have room for heavy objects (e.g. motorcycle). This might mean that the axle load on the rear axle is exceeded.

However, the individual axles may not be overloaded under any circumstances. That is why it is important, at which distance to the axles the load is stored.

To distribute the load correctly, you will need a scale, a tape measure, a calculator and some time.

Two simple formulas are needed to calculate the effect of the weight of the load on the axles:

Formulas A x G : R = weight on the rear axle

Weight on the rear axle - G = weight on the front axle

Explanation A = distance between storage compartment and front axle in cm

G = weight of the load in the storage compartment in kg

R = wheelbase of the vehicle (distance between axles) in cm

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Loading the vehicle correctly - 3

Calculating axle loads:

Measure the external distances horizontally from the centre of the front wheel to the centre of the storage compartment or to the centre of the back wheel.

■ Multiply the distance between storage compartment and front axle (A) with the weight of the load in the storage compartment (G) and divide the result by the wheelbase (R). The result is the weight of the load in the storage compartment on the rear axle. Make a note of this weight and of the storage compartment.
In a second step, subtract the weight in the storage compartment (G) from the weight calculated beforehand. If the result is a positive value (example 1), this means that the load on the front axle is reduced by this value. If the result is a negative value (example 2), this means that the load on the front axle is increased. Make a note of this value, too.
■ Calculate all storage compartments of the vehicle in the same way.
In a last step, add all weights calculated for the rear axle to the rear axle load and add (or subtract) all weights calculated for the front axle to (from) the front axle load.

How to determine rear axle load and front axle load is described in section 4.3.2.

If the calculated value exceeds the permissible axle load, the load must be distributed in a different way.

If the load on the front axle is too low, the grip of the tyres on the road is reduced (traction). This applies in particular to vehicles with front wheel drive. In this case, the load must be redistributed, too.

Example calculation

Example 1 Example 2
Distance to the front axleA(A1) 450 (cm)(A2) 250 (cm)
Weight in the storage compartmentGx 100 (kg)x 50 (kg)
Wheelbase of the vehicleR÷ 325 (cm)÷ 325 (cm)
Load on the rear axle(add to the axle load)138.5 (kg)38.5 (kg)
Weight in the storage compartment- 100 (kg)- 50 (kg)
Load relief to the front axle(subtract from the axle load)38.5 (kg)
Load on the front axle(add to the axle load)-11.5 (kg)

4.3.4 Roof load

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Roof load - 1

▶ Access the roof only when a roof rail has been fitted. Always use the ladder at the rear to climb onto the roof.
▶ Take care when stepping onto the ladder. There is danger of slipping when the ladder is moist or icy.
▶ Take care when stepping onto the roof. There is danger of slipping when the roof is moist or icy.
▶ Do not overload the roof. Road behaviour and brake reaction deteriorate as the roof load increases.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Roof load - 2

If the vehicle is equipped with a roof rail, load racks can be mounted on the roof rail for roof loads (e.g. for surfboards, rubber boats or light canoes). Special girder systems are available as accessory. The authorised dealer or service centre will be happy to advise you.
The maximum permissible roof load is 100 kg.
The vehicle roof is not suitable for localised load. Before stepping on to the roof, extensively cover the area you will be treading on. Materials with a smooth or soft surface are suitable, for example, a thick polystyrene panel.
▷ Secure roof loads with tension belts. Do not use rubber expanders.
Observe the overall height of the vehicle when the roof rack is loaded.
The driver's cabin should have a clearly visible notice stating the overall height. This eliminates the need for calculations at bridges and thoroughfares.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Roof load - 3

Rear ladder

3 2 1 4 5 HYW07384

Fig. 1 Rear ladder lock

Folding downwards:

■ Insert the key into the locking cylinder (Fig. 1,2) of the rear ladder lock (Fig. 1,1) and turn it a quarter turn until the key is in a vertical position.
■ Hold the foldable part of the rear ladder (Fig. 1,4) and swing out the securing bracket (Fig. 1,5).
■ Pull out the key and fold the rear ladder downwards.

Folding upwards:

■ Fold the rear ladder upwards and hold it firmly.
■ Insert the key into the locking cylinder (Fig. 1,2) of the rear ladder lock (Fig. 1,1).
■ Swivel the securing bracket (Fig. 1,5) inward around the tube of the fixed part of the rear ladder (Fig. 1,3).
■ Turn the key a quarter turn until it is in a horizontal position.
■ Check the rear ladder lock: Slightly pull on the rear ladder.

4.3.5 Rear garage

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Rear garage - 1

▶ Observe the permissible axle loads and maximum permissible gross weight when loading the rear garage.
The maximum permissible load of the rear garage is 200 kg. Do not exceed the permissible rear axle load.
▶ Observe: If the rear garage or (depending on the model) the rear storage space is loaded to its maximum capacity, this will reduce the load on the front axle due to the levering action. The driving quality is impaired.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Rear garage - 2

Depending on the vehicle equipment, clamping rails with clamping eyelets are mounted in the rear garage or in the rear storage space. Always secure loads onto the clamping eyelets. Always use tightening straps or lashing nets for securing the load, never rubber expanders.
When clamping loads, always check that the clamping eyelets are placed tightly in the clamping rails. If the clamping eyelet is not anchored tightly in the clamping rail, the load may slide or loosen during forcible movements of the steering wheel or when braking.
▷ Distribute the load evenly. Excessive spot loads can lead to damages of the floor covering.

1 2 1 1 2 1 HYW07737

1 Clamping eyelet
2 Clamping rail

Fig. 2 Clamping eyelets rear garage

Moving the clamping eyelets:

■ Turn the clamping eyelet (Fig. 2,1) half a turn in an anticlockwise direction.
■ Push the clamping eyelet into the clamping rail (Fig. 2,2) to the desired position.
■ Give clamping eyelet one half turn in a clockwise direction. The clamping eyelet sits tightly in the clamping rail again.
■ Check that the clamping eyelet is tight.

4.3.6 Double floor

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Double floor - 1

▶ Observe the permissible axle loads and maximum permissible gross weight when loading the double floor.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Double floor - 2

▷ Distribute the load evenly. Excessive spot loads can lead to damages of the floor covering.

4.3.7 Sliding drawer

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Sliding drawer - 1

Do not place loads weighing more than 40 kg into the sliding drawer.

4.3.8 Bike rack

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Bike rack - 1

▶ Observe the permissible axle loads and maximum permissible gross weight when loading the bike rack.
▶ Bicycles may not jut out beyond the maximum width of the vehicle. Adjust the attachments for the bikes accordingly.
▶ Load the bike rack with bicycles only (max. four units).
▶ Check the secure attachment of the bicycles on the bike rack after the first 10 km and then at each break in the journey.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Bike rack - 2

The identification plate and rear lights must not be covered.
▶ Driving with a folded out bike rack without bicycles is not permitted.
▷ Before every journey, check:

Is the bike rack without bicycles folded in correctly?

Are the bicycles securely fastened to the bike rack using the bike rack belts?

Loading the bike rack with bicycles

When loading the bike rack, observe the centre of gravity. The centre of gravity of the bicycles must be as close as possible to the rear wall of the vehicle. The bike rack should always be loaded from the inside to the outside.

Loading the bike rack correctly:

■ Depending on the model, fold the bike rack down or pull it out.
■ Place the heaviest bicycle directly against the rear wall.
■ Place the lightest bicycles in the centre or on the outside of the bike rack.
■ Secure the front and rear wheels of each bicycle with the retaining straps on the bike rack.
In addition, fasten the outermost bicycle depending on the model of the bike rack on the retaining clip or the retaining bracket and to the spacer respectively.

If the bike rack is only loaded with one bicycle, position the bicycle as closely as possible to the rear wall.

4.4 Towing

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Towing - 1

▶ Care is to be taken when connecting and detaching a trailer. Risk of accident and injury!
▶ No persons are to be between the towing vehicle and the trailer during positioning for connecting and detaching.
▶ Observe the permissible nose weight and rear axle load of the towing vehicle. Nose weight and rear axle load must not be exceeded. The values of the nose weight and rear axle load are included in the documents of the vehicle and the caravan coupling.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Towing - 2

▶ Trailer with an overrun brake: Do not connect or detach trailer with the overrun brake on.

Caravan coupling with detachable ball neck: If the ball neck is mounted incorrectly, there is the danger of the trailer breaking away. Observe the instruction manual for the caravan coupling.

4.5 Entrance step

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Entrance step - 1

▶ Before commencing the journey and after short interruptions of the journey, ensure that the entrance step is completely retracted.
▶ Do not stand in the direct range of the entrance step while it is being retracted or extended.
▶ Do not step on the entrance step until it has extended completely. There is a risk of injury.
▶ Do not under any circumstances raise or lower persons or loads with the entrance step.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Entrance step - 2

Take note of the different step heights and make certain that the ground is firm and even when exiting.
Do not grease or lubricate the pivot bearing and joints of the entrance step (see chapter 12).
The switch to operate the entrance step is located on the inside of the vehicle in the area of the conversion door.
If the entrance step has not been properly retracted and locked into place, a warning tone is heard when the ignition is switched on.
▶ Follow the warning notice on the entrance step.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Entrance step - 3

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Entrance step - 4

natural_image Close-up of a black square button with a circular dial and directional arrows, labeled '1' (no text or symbols beyond label)

1 2 DET00570

Fig. 3 Operating switch entrance step Fig. 4 Operating switch for entrance step (alternative)

Before stepping on the entrance step, fully extend it.

Extending:

■ Press lower part of the rocker switch (Fig. 3,1) or press the left switch (Fig. 4,1) until the entrance step has extended completely.

Retracting:

■ Press upper part of the rocker switch (Fig. 3,1) or press the right switch (Fig. 4,2) until the entrance step has retracted completely.

The entrance step can also be retracted and extended with the remote control.

1 2 DET00189

Fig. 5 Remote control for entrance step

Extending:

■ Press the switch (Fig. 5,1) until the entrance step has extended completely.

Retracting:

■ Press the switch (Fig. 5,2) until the entrance step has retracted completely.

Emergency operation

If the electric drive of the entrance step fails, follow the directions below to manually retract the entrance step:

■ Pull out the securing splint from the connection to the engine.
■ Release the rectangular connection to the engine using a suitable object (e.g. a screwdriver).
■ Push in the entrance step by hand and secure it using a suitable device (e.g. a string).
■ Contact customer service.

4.6 PVC-floor covering

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - PVC-floor covering - 1

Shoes with pointed heels can leave permanent impressions in the PVC-floor covering. Never wear shoes with pointed heels in the vehicle.
Rubber mats or long exposure to ketchup, carrot juice, ink, blood or lipstick can discolour the PVC-floor covering. If possible, remove stains from the floor immediately.

4.7 Television

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Television - 1

Before commencing the journey, remove the television from the support and store it securely.
Before commencing the journey, place and secure the flat screen and screen support in the initial position. If the screen holder is installed in a TV cabinet: Close TV cabinet.
Before commencing the journey, ensure that the antenna is in park position. Danger of accidents! Park position means: The antenna points towards the back, is fully lowered and is locked in this position.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Television - 2

▶ Further information on positioning the flat screen can be obtained from chapter 7.

Holder in the TV cabinet The flat screen is attached to a console in the TV cabinet.

2 1 DET00344

Fig. 6 Holder in the TV cabinet

Storing the flat screen:

■ Rotate the flat screen to its initial position and lock it into place.
■ Insert the holder for the flat screen on the handle (Fig. 6,1) until the latch (Fig. 6,2) locks into place.
■ Close TV cabinet.

Holder with jointed arm The flat screen is fastened to a jointed arm.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Television - 4

natural_image Exterior view of a modern flat-screen monitor mounted on a stand, no visible text or symbols on the screen or surroundings.

Fig. 7 Holder with jointed arm

Storing the flat screen:

■ Swivel flat screen back to its initial position and lock it into place.

4.8 Sink cover

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Sink cover - 1

In the event of an accident or emergency braking, the sink cover (Fig. 8,1) could injure the occupants of the vehicle. Before the journey, take the sink cover off the sink and store it securely in the kitchen unit or wardrobe.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Sink cover - 2

natural_image Interior view of a bathroom sink with a circular drain and a metal stand (no text or symbols visible)

Fig. 8 Sink cover

4.9 Roman shades for driver's window and front passenger's window

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Roman shades for driver's window and front passenger's window - 1

▶ While travelling, the Roman shades for the windscreen, driver's window and front passenger's window must be open, in a fixed position and secured.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Roman shades for driver's window and front passenger's window - 2

natural_image Close-up of a metallic mechanical component with a vertical rod and attached bracket, next to a striped curtain (no text or symbols visible)

Fig. 9 Locking mechanism for Roman shade on driver's/front passenger's windows

Securing:

■ On the Roman shades for the driver's and passenger's window, push the handle (Fig. 9,1) onto the cap. The Roman shade is secured.

4.10 Central locking system for kitchen unit

1 2 DE100671

Fig. 10 Switch for the kitchen unit's central locking system

1 Panel

2 Switch for the kitchen unit's central locking system

Depending on the model, the kitchen unit is fitted with a central locking system. The flaps and drawers of the kitchen unit can be locked and unlocked manually via the switch (Fig. 10,2) behind the movable panel (Fig. 10,1).

When you start the vehicle engine, the central locking system is activated automatically.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Central locking system for kitchen unit - 2

If a flap or drawer is open when the vehicle's engine is started, it will be locked automatically following closing.

4.11 Snow chains

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Snow chains - 1

▶ Only mount snow chains if there is a clearance of at least 50 mm between the tyres and the vehicle body.

When using snow chains, the tyres, wheel suspension and steering are subjected to an additional load. When using snow chains, drive slowly (maximum speed 50 km/h) and only on streets which are completely covered with snow. Otherwise the vehicle could be damaged.

Observe the fitting instructions issued by the manufacturer of the snow chains.

▶ Only use snow chains approved by IVECO.

Do not fit snow chains on alloy wheel rims.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Snow chains - 2

If the drive axle of the vehicle has twin tyres (2 tyres next to each other), mount the the snow chains to the outer tyres.
The snow chains are available at your IVECO dealer.

The use of snow chains is subject to the legal regulations of the individual countries.

● Always mount snow chains to the drive wheels.
● After a few metres, check the tension of the snow chains.

4.12 Road safety

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Road safety - 1

▶ Check tyre pressure before a journey or every 2 weeks. Wrong tyre pressure causes excessive wear and can lead to damage or even to tyre burst. You can lose control of the vehicle.

Before commencing the journey, work through the checklist:

Base vehicle

No.Checks Checked
1All vehicle documents are on board
2Tyres in proper condition
3Vehicle lighting, brake lights and reversing lights function
4Oil levels for engine, gearbox and power steering controlled
5Coolant and fluid for windscreen washers filled up
6Brakes function
7Brakes react evenly
8When braking, the vehicle remains in the lane

Housing body, outside

9 Awning completely retracted
10 Roof free of snow and ice (in winter)
11 External connections and lines disconnected and stored away
12 External supports removed
13 Fitted steady legs retracted and fixed in place
14 Wheel chocks removed and stored away
No. Checks Checked
15 Entrance step retracted (observe warning tone)
16 External flaps closed and locked
17 Conversion door locked
18 Overall height of the vehicle including roof rack when loaded measured and noted. Keep the height information close at hand in the driver's cabin
Housing body, inside
19 Windows and skylights closed and locked
20 Television secured in the TV cabinet or removed from the support and stored securely
21 Television antenna retracted (if one is built in)
22 Loose parts stored away or fixed in position
23 Open storage spaces empty
24 Refrigerator door secured
25 All drawers and flaps closed
26 Living area doors and sliding doors secured
27 Children's seats mounted to seats with three-point safety belts
28 Shades in the driver's cabin opened and secured
Gas system
Electrical system

Chapter overview

This chapter contains instructions on how to drive the motorhome.

The instructions address the following topics:

  • reversing camera
  • driving speed
  • brakes
  • seat belts
  • seats and headrests
  • seating arrangement
    • electrically adjustable external mirrors
  • sun blinds
  • pneumatic spring
  • bonnet
    ● windscreen washer fluid container
    • cooling water compensator reservoir
  • filling the tank

5.1 Driving the motorhome

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Driving the motorhome - 1

The base vehicle is a commercial vehicle (small truck). Adjust your driving technique accordingly.
▶ Before commencing the journey and after short interruptions of the journey, ensure that the entrance step is completely retracted.
During the journey, seat belts should always be worn at the seats that have seat belts mounted.
▶ Never open your seat belts when travelling.
▶ Passengers must remain in the seats provided.
▶ The doors must remain locked.
▶ Avoid braking with a jerk.
▶ If a navigation system is used, only change the destination when the vehicle is stationary. Drive to a car park or stop in a safe area when changing the destination.
▶ Do not play DVDs using the monitor of the navigation system during the journey.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Driving the motorhome - 2

▶ Drive slowly on poor roads.
Take extreme care when driving onto ferries, crossing uneven roads and driving in reverse. Because of the relatively large overhang, larger vehicles might swing out and "touch ground" in unfavourable conditions. This can cause damage to the underbody or to parts fitted there.
If an accident occurs as a result of these instructions not being observed, the manufacturer will not be responsible for damages caused.
The safety measures stipulated in chapter 3 have to be observed.
If a reversing camera is installed in the vehicle, the camera is automatically switched on when driving in reverse gear.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Driving the motorhome - 3

5.2 Reversing camera

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Reversing camera - 1

natural_image Close-up of a mechanical component with a labeled dimension (1) and identifier (DET00572), no readable text or symbols beyond the label.

Fig. 11 Reversing camera

Depending on the model, a reversing camera (Fig. 11,1) with LCD monitor is installed in the vehicle.

The camera and the LCD monitor are switched on automatically when the ignition is switched on or if the vehicle's engine is running and you drive in reverse gear.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Reversing camera - 2

Refer to the unit manufacturer's separate instruction manual for details of how to operate the LCD monitor.

5.3 Driving speed

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Driving speed - 1

The vehicle is equipped with a powerful engine. This means there are sufficient reserves in difficult traffic situations. This high power enables a high maximum speed and requires above-average driving ability.
The vehicle provides a large contact surface for wind. A sudden cross-wind can be especially dangerous.
▶ Uneven or one-sided loading affects road performance.
- Driving on unknown streets, you may encounter hazardous road conditions and unexpected driving situations. Therefore, in the interest of safety, make sure your driving speed is appropriate to any given driving situation and environment.
▶ Adhere to the national legal speed limits.

5.4 Brakes

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Brakes - 1

▶ Have defects on the braking system immediately remedied by an authorised specialist workshop.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Brakes - 2

Avoid block braking. Block braking gives the tyres "brake plates" of varying strength. This reduces driving comfort. It might even make the tyres unserviceable.

Before each journey Before each journey, check by means of a braking test:

  • Do the brakes function?
  • Do the brakes react evenly?
  • Does the vehicle remain in the lane when braking?

5.5 Seat belts

The vehicle is equipped with automatic three-point safety belts in the living area on the seats for which seat belts are compulsory by law. National regulations apply seat-belt fastening.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Seat belts - 1

▶ Fasten your seat belts before the beginning of the journey and keep them fastened during the journey.
▶ Do not damage or trap belts. Have damaged seat belts changed by an authorised specialist workshop.
▶ Do not alter the belt fixing devices, automatic seat belt winders and the belt clips.
Inspect the screwed connections of the seat belts from time to time in order to ensure that they are correctly seated.
▶ Only use one seat belt for one adult person.
▶ Do not belt in objects together with persons.
▶ Seat belts are not sufficient for persons who are less than 150 cm tall. In these cases use additional restraining devices. Observe test certificate.
▶ Factory-set three-point safety belts must be used when attaching child restraint systems.
▶ After an accident, replace the seat belts.
During the journey, do not tilt the backrest too far backwards. Otherwise the functionality of the seat belt is no longer guaranteed.

5.5.1 Fastening the seat belt correctly

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Fastening the seat belt correctly - 1

▶ Do not twist the belt. The belt must be positioned smoothly against the body.

▶ When fastening the seat belt, adopt the correct sitting position.

The seat belt is fastened correctly when a fist can be passed between the body and the seat belt.

5.6 Driver's seat and front passenger's seat

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Driver's seat and front passenger's seat - 1

Before commencing the journey, rotate all swivel seats in the direction of travel and lock in position.

The seats must remain fixed in position during the journey and are not to be rotated.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Driver's seat and front passenger's seat - 2

The driver's and front passenger's seat are a part of the base vehicle, depending on model and vehicle equipment. In this case the adjustment of the seats is described in the operating instructions of the base vehicle.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Driver's seat and front passenger's seat - 3

natural_image Interior view of a car seat with labeled parts (1 and 2), no visible text or symbols beyond labels

Fig. 12 Operating controls in front of the seat

1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 DET00574

Fig. 13 Operating controls next to the seat

Rotating seat into driving position

The seats can be rotated in any direction. The seats can only be locked in position in the direction of travel.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Rotating seat into driving position - 1

■ Push both armrests upward.
■ Push the seat backwards or into the central position.
■ Rotate the seat in the direction of travel and lock in position.
▶ Rotating the seats in the pitched vehicle is described in chapter 7.

Adjusting seat in lengthways direction

Adjust the driver's seat so that the driver can depress the pedals comfortably.

■ Pull the bar (Fig. 12,1) upwards.
■ Push the seat forwards or backwards.
■ Release the bar. The seat must audibly lock into place.

Adjusting the seat depth Adjust the seat so that the thighs rest on the seat surface.

Setting the seat inclination

■ Pull the handle (Fig. 12,2) upwards.
■ Push the seat forwards or backwards.
■ Release handle. The seat must audibly lock into place.

Adjust the seat inclination so that the thighs rest on the seat surface without any pressure.

■ Pull the handle (Fig. 13,3) upwards.
■ Bring the seat into the desired inclination position by applying or relieving pressure.
■ Release handle. The seat must audibly lock into place.

Adjusting the seat height

Adjust the seat height so that the thighs rest on the seat without pressure and the driver can depress the pedals comfortably.

■ If the seat should move up: Pull the handle (Fig. 13,4) upwards.
■ If the seat should move down: Push the handle down (Fig. 13,4).
■ If the seat should be lowered quickly: Push the handle down (Fig. 13,5). The seat moves into the lowest position.
■ If the seat should move into its normal position after quick lowering: Pull the handle (Fig. 13,5) upwards.

Adjusting the cushioning

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Adjusting the cushioning - 1

The cushioning can be steplessly adjusted from "soft" to "hard".

▶ Always adjust the cushions on the driver's seat so that the feet are always in contact with the pedals, even when the road surface is poor.

■ Pull the handle (Fig. 13,2) upwards. The cushioning becomes "softer".
■ Push the handle down (Fig. 13,2). The cushioning becomes "harder".
The air spring adjusts itself automatically to the person's weight.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Adjusting the cushioning - 2

Adjusting the backrest

Adjust the angle of the backrest so that the steering wheel can be held with the arms slightly bent.

■ Pull the handle (Fig. 13,8) upwards.
■ Bring the backrest into the desired inclination position by applying or relieving pressure.
■ Release handle. The backrest must audibly lock into place.

Adjusting the lumbar support

The chambers of the lumbar support can be adjusted separately.

■ Press the upper part of the switch (Fig. 13,6). The air chamber fills.
■ Press the lower part of the switch (Fig. 13,6). The air chamber empties.

Adjusting the armrest The height of the armrests can be steplessly adjusted.

■ Turn the knurled wheel (Fig. 13,1). The armrest inclines upwards or downwards, depending on the rotation direction.

Switching on the seat heater

The seat heater can be adjusted in two stages.

■ Press the front part of the switch (Fig. 13,7). The seat heater is on. The LED on the switch lights up.
■ Press the rear part of the switch (Fig. 13,7). The seat heater is switched to fast heating. The LED on the switch lights up.

5.7 Headrests

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Headrests - 1

The headrests are not adjustable for all models.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Headrests - 2

natural_image Interior view of a car backrest with two side pillows and striped bedding (no visible text or symbols)

Fig. 14 Bench headrest

Before commencing the journey, adjust the headrests (Fig. 14,1) so that the back of the head is supported at approximately ear height. Push the headrests upwards or downwards by hand.

5.8 Seating arrangement

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Seating arrangement - 1

During the journey, persons are only to sit on the permitted seats. The authorised number of seats is stipulated in the vehicle documents.
▶ During the journey sitting on the divans is not permitted.
▶ Seat belts must be worn by all passengers.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Seating arrangement - 2

natural_image Silhouette of a seated person in a chair inside a circle (no text or symbols)

Fig. 15 "Seat" symbol

Seats which may be used during travel are equipped with a sticker (Fig. 15).

5.9 Electrically adjustable external mirrors

Depending on the model, the vehicle is equipped with two electrically adjustable and heated external mirrors. The switches for external mirror adjustment and the mirror heater are on the dashboard.

1 2 DE100575

Fig. 16 Switch for electrically adjustable external mirrors

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Electrically adjustable external mirrors - 2

natural_image Front view of a car dashboard with air gauges and control buttons (no readable text or symbols)

Fig. 17 Switch for mirror heater

Adjusting:

■ Select the mirror to be adjusted. To do so, push the flip switch (Fig. 16,1) to the left or right.

■ Adjust the mirror by pressing the switch (Fig. 16,2) in the appropriate direction.

■ Press the switch (Fig. 17,1) on the dashboard. The switch indicator lamp shows it is in operation.

5.10 Sun visors

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Sun visors - 1

natural_image Close-up of mechanical components and a vehicle's side profile, no visible text or symbols

Fig. 18 Sun visor Fig. 19 Sun visor switch

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Sun visors - 2

natural_image Close-up of a wall-mounted control panel with buttons and a circular dial, no visible text or symbols

Depending on the model, the vehicle has two electrically operated sun visors (Fig. 18,1).

The switches for operating the sun visors are each installed in outside of the panelling on the left and right.

Extending the sun visor:

■ Press the lower part of the switch (Fig. 19,1). The sun visor moves down.

■ When the desired position is reached or the sun visor has been completely extended: Release the switch.

Retracting the sun visor:

■ Press the upper part of the switch (Fig. 19,1). The sun visor moves up.

■ When the desired position is reached or the sun visor has been completely retracted: Release the switch.

5.11 Pneumatic spring

5.11.1 Pneumatic spring (Goldschmidt)

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Pneumatic spring (Goldschmidt) - 1

▶ Only drive at a steady, low speed if there is a fault with the pneumatic spring and have the fault immediately repaired by an authorised specialist workshop.
▶ Do not allow children to play with the system.
The compressor becomes very hot during operation. Do not touch the compressor during operation and for a short time after operation.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Pneumatic spring (Goldschmidt) - 2

▶ Only operate the system when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running.
Do not exceed the maximum permissible pressure of 9 bar (130 PSI).
▶ Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Pneumatic spring (Goldschmidt) - 3

5 4 3 2 1 DE100579

Fig. 20 Control unit for pneumatic spring

1 Operating switch for pneumatic springs (circuit 1)
2 Pressure gauge (circuit 1)
3 Control unit
4 Pressure gauge (circuit 2)
5 Operating switch for pneumatic springs (circuit 2)

The pneumatic springs of circuits 1 and 2 can be controlled separately via the operating switches (Fig. 20,1 and 5).

Increasing the pressure in the pneumatic springs:

■ Press up the operating switch (Fig. 20,1 or 5) on the control unit (Fig. 20,3). When doing so, monitor the pressure on the pressure gauge (Fig. 20,2 or 4).
■ Press down the operating switch (Fig. 20,1 or 5) on the control unit (Fig. 20,3). When doing so, monitor the pressure on the pressure gauge (Fig. 20,2 or 4).

Reducing the pressure in the pneumatic springs:

Overheating protection

The system has automatic overheating protection. When the overheating protection responds, allow the system to cool down for at least 30 minutes.

5.11.2 Pneumatic spring (VB-air suspension)

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Pneumatic spring (VB-air suspension) - 1

▶ Only drive at a steady, low speed if there is a fault with the pneumatic spring and have the fault immediately repaired by an authorised specialist workshop.
▶ Only operate the remote control, if people or objects are not in the working area under the vehicle.
▶ Do not allow children to play with the system.
The compressor becomes very hot during operation. Do not touch the compressor during operation and for a short time after operation.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Pneumatic spring (VB-air suspension) - 2

▶ Only raise or lower the vehicle when parked.
Before raising or lowering, always apply the handbrake and put the gear into the neutral position ("take out" gear).
- Depending on the model, not all the functions described here are available at all times. - Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Pneumatic spring (VB-air suspension) - 3

12 11 10 9 8 AUTO SWITCH OFF SWITCH COM AUTO SWITCH DET00656

1 Indicator lamp
2 Sport function button
3 Parking function button
4 Raise button
5 Lower button
6 Axle selection display
7 Axle selection button
8 Service button
9 Saved level 2 button
10 Saved level 1 button
11 Off road function button
12 Levelling function button

Fig. 21 Remote control

The pneumatic spring provides the vehicle with fully automatic levelling control.

Various pneumatic spring functions can also be switched manually via the buttons on the remote control. The increase of ground clearance simplifies e.g. driving onto ferries (bigger gradient angle) or driving on rough terrain.

A short beeping tone is sounded when a button is pressed.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Pneumatic spring (VB-air suspension) - 5

All button functions are available only if the ignition has been switched on and the engine is running. In addition, the button functions remain available for 1 hour after the ignition has been switched off (run-down time).

The following functions can be selected via the buttons:

Button Function
SPORT(Fig. 21,2)Switching sport function on and off.When the sport function is activated, the vehicle is lowered and its driving stability is increased.
CAR PARK(Fig. 21,3)Switching parking function on and off.When the parking function is activated, the vehicle is lowered to the lowest possible level. This simplifies e.g. driving into a garage with a low clearance height.⚠️ ▶ When this function is activated, never drive faster than 25 km/h. When this speed is exceeded, the function is automatically deactivated and the vehicle is raised to the normal level.
↑(Fig. 21,4)Raising the vehicle.Possibility A: Press the button briefly in order to raise the vehicle to one of the three levels that have been preprogrammed at the factory.Possibility B: Press button until the required level or the highest position is reached.
↓(Fig. 21,5)Lowering the vehicle.Possibility A: Press the button briefly in order to lower the vehicle to one of the three levels that have been preprogrammed at the factory.Possibility B: Press button until the required level or the lowest position is reached.
FRONT REAR(Fig. 21,7)Axle selection.Possibility A: Press the button briefly in order to change between the pneumatic spring for the front axle and the one for the rear axle.Possibility B: Press the button for longer in order to change to the pneumatic spring of both axles.The blue lamps in the wheels of the illustrated vehicle (Fig. 21,6) show which axle is activated for operation.
SERVICE(Fig. 21,8)Activating or deactivating the system or ending the run-down time.
M1 (Fig. 21,10)M2 (Fig. 21,9)Raising or lowering to the saved level. Press the button briefly to do this.Save:Bring the vehicle to the desired level using the buttons " ↑ and " ↓Keep the memory button "M1" or "M2" pressed until a long beeping tone is sounded.The selected level has been saved.
OFF ROAD(Fig. 21,11)Activating and deactivating the off road function.When the off road function is activated, the vehicle is raised to give it more ground clearance.
AUTO LEVEL(Fig. 21,12)Activating and deactivating the levelling function.When the levelling function is activated, the vehicle is aligned horizontally (e.g. on an uneven parking site).If you drive with the levelling function activated, the function is automatically switched off when a speed of 8 km/h is exceeded, and the vehicle is adjusted to the normal level.

The indicator lamps in the buttons and on the remote control show the operating states of the individual functions.

LED SignificationStatus
Blue or green LED in the function buttonOff Function inactive
Flashing The system is carrying out the selected function
Illuminated The selected function is active
Red LED in the service buttonOff Function inactive
Illuminated Function active. The system is deactivated
Red LED "CHECK"Off The system is operating without faults
Lights up brieflyThe system has started up without any problems
Flashing There is a fault in the system. For troubleshooting, see the section 15.2.2

5.12 Bonnet

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Bonnet - 1

When the bonnet is open, there is a risk of injury in the engine compartment.
Even if the engine was switched off some time ago, it might still be hot. Danger of burns!
▶ Do not work in the engine compartment while the engine is running.
The bonnet must be kept firmly closed and locked during the journey. After closing, check whether the lock has engaged. In order to carry this out, pull on the bonnet.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Bonnet - 2

natural_image Close-up of a mechanical component with labeled part '1' and identifier 'DE700580' (no readable text or symbols beyond labels)

Fig. 22 Release lever on the inside of the bonnet

1 2 DE T00581

Fig. 23 Release lever on the outside of the bonnet

Opening:

■ Pull the lever (Fig. 22,1) situated on the left-hand side of the vehicle under the dashboard. The bonnet opens as far as the safety hook allows.
■ Reach under the bonnet with one hand and actuate the safety hook (Fig. 23,2). To do this, turn the extension (Fig. 23,1) in an anticlockwise direction.
■ Move the bonnet in an arch forwards and downwards.

Closing:

■ Move the bonnet in an arch upwards and backwards until the latch engages audibly in place.
■ Check whether the bonnet is locked correctly. In order to carry this out, pull on the bonnet.

5.13 Filling with washer fluid

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Filling with washer fluid - 1

natural_image Close-up of a white spray gun with a circular cover and label '1' pointing to its side (no readable text or symbols on the gun itself)

Fig. 24 Washer fluid container filler neck

■ Unlock and open the bonnet.
■ Remove the lid (Fig. 24,1) from the filler neck of the washer fluid container.
■ Slowly fill in washer fluid.
■ Push the lid onto the filler neck of the washer fluid container.

5.14 Refilling cooling water

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Refilling cooling water - 1

▶ Allow the coolant to cool down before opening the cooling system. Risk of scalding!
▶ Allow the cooling system to cool down before opening. The cooling system is under high pressure when it is hot. There is a risk of injury.

1 2 1 DET00582

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Refilling cooling water - 3

natural_image Close-up of a metallic component with two labeled parts (1 and 2), no visible text or symbols beyond labels

Fig. 25 Cover in the dashboard Fig. 26 Engine compartment cover

■ Loosen the two screws (Fig. 25,1) and take off the cover (Fig. 25,2).
■ Unscrew six hexagon socket screws (Fig. 26,1) and remove them with the washers.
■ Remove cover (Fig. 26,2).

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Refilling cooling water - 4

natural_image Close-up of a mechanical component with a circular emblem and numbered label (1), no readable text or symbols beyond the label.

Fig. 27 Cover on the cooling water compensator reservoir

■ Open the cover (Fig. 27,1) carefully and allow the pressure to escape.
■ Remove the cover and top up with cooling water from a suitable vessel (e.g. a bottle).
■ Screw the cover (Fig. 27,1) back onto the cooling water compensator reservoir.
■ Screw both covers (Fig. 26,2 and Fig. 25,2) securely back in place.

5.15 Filling up with diesel

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Filling up with diesel - 1

▶ No appliance operated by a naked flame (e.g. heater or refrigerator) may be in operation when filling the tank, on ferries or in the garage. Danger of explosion!

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Filling up with diesel - 2

Depending on the model, the fuel filler neck is part of the base vehicle. In this case, filling the tank is described in the operating manual of the base vehicle.
The fuel filler neck is labelled with the word "Diesel".

The fuel filler neck is situated on the exterior of the vehicle, at the front left.

1 2 DET00585

Fig. 28 Cap for the fuel filler neck

Opening:

■ Swivel the flap (Fig. 28,2) to the side.
■ Insert the key in the locking cylinder (Fig. 28,1) and turn it in an anticlockwise direction.
■ Remove the cap.

Closing:

■ Place the cap on the fuel filler neck.
■ Turn key in a clockwise direction.
■ Remove the key.
■ Check that the cap is fastened securely on the fuel filler neck.
■ Close flap.

Chapter overview

This chapter contains instructions on how to pitch the vehicle.

The instructions address the following topics:

  • handbrake
  • entrance step
  • wheel chocks
    • operation of the supports
  • 240 V connection

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Chapter overview - 1

▶ Pitch the vehicle so that it is as horizontal as possible. Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling.
Animals (especially mice) can cause great damage to the interior of the vehicle. To prevent this from happening, regularly check the vehicle for damages or animal traces after pitching.

6.1 Handbrake

Firmly apply the handbrake when parking the vehicle.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Handbrake - 1

If there is any risk of frost, release the handbrake every now and then and apply it again. This will prevent it from freezing or rusting. Prior to releasing the handbrake, secure the vehicle so that is cannot roll away.

6.2 Entrance step

In order to exit the vehicle, first fully extend the entrance step.

6.3 Wheel chocks

When parking the vehicle on slopes or inclines use the wheel chocks.

If the maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle exceeds 4 tonnes, wheel chocks must be used when parking on gradients. The wheel chocks are provided as standard for vehicles with a maximum permissible gross weight exceeding 4 tonnes.

6.4 Supports

6.4.1 General instructions

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - General instructions - 1

Do not use the fitted supports as a vehicle jack. They supports are only for stabilising the parked vehicle to prevent the rear axle from bottoming out.
▷ When pitching the vehicle, ensure that the supports are evenly loaded.
Before driving away, wind up the supports as far as they can go, fully retract and secure them.
When the ground is soft, place a pad or block under the supports in order to prevent the vehicle from sinking into the ground.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - General instructions - 2

6.4.2 Steady legs

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Steady legs - 1

Make sure that all steady legs are retracted completely and that the guide disc for each steady leg has been completely retracted into the notch.

In order to ensure their correct function, clean and grease the interior tubes of the steady legs regularly.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Steady legs - 2

natural_image Close-up of a hand using a tool to adjust or install a mechanical component, labeled with numbers 1, 2, and 3 (no text or symbols on the device itself)

Fig. 29 Steady leg

Extending:

■ Place the socket spanner on the hexagon nut (Fig. 29,1) and rotate. The steady leg swings downward and is automatically extended.
■ Rotate the hexagonal nut until the steady leg rests completely on the ground and the motorhome is in a horizontal position.

Retracting:

■ Place the socket spanner on the hexagon nut (Fig. 29,1) and rotate until the steady leg is clear of the ground.
■ Rotate the hexagonal nut with the socket spanner until the steady leg has swung upwards and the guide disc (Fig. 29,3) has completely retracted into the notch (Fig. 29,2).

6.4.3 Electrical steady legs

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Electrical steady legs - 1

The engine can then also be left on (to charge the batteries) if the steady legs are extended. Before moving off, always check that the steady legs are retracted completely (observe warning light and warning tone).
▶ Only extend and retract the steady legs if the areas around the legs are totally clear of obstacles.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Electrical steady legs - 2

Steady legs need sufficient ground clearance to be able to fold out vertically.
▷ Before operating the steady legs, release the handbrake.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Electrical steady legs - 3

▶ Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.

ares engineering GoJ Step! Leveliq Tronic 2 1 DET00545

Fig. 30 Display Fig. 31 Remote control

UP DOWN 1 2 3 4 5 6 Level Tronic DET00546

LED indicator

LED indicatorSignification
Green LED (Fig. 30,2) onSteady legs retracted completely, system ready to operate
Green LED (Fig. 30,2) on, red LED (Fig. 30,1) onSteady legs extended, system ready to operate

Button functions

Button Function
UP(Fig. 31,6)Retract steady leg (Start/Stop)< 1 second = single steady leg> 1 second + button "1" = two steady legs
DOWN(Fig. 31,1)Extend steady leg (Start/Stop)< 1 second = single steady leg> 1 second + button "2" = all four steady legs
1(Fig. 31,5)Front steady leg, left< 1 second = selects steady leg> 1 second + button "2" = automatic levelling> 1 second + "UP" button = retracts two steady legs
2(Fig. 31,2)Front steady leg, right< 1 second = selects steady leg> 1 second + "DOWN" button = extends all steady legs
3(Fig. 31,4)Rear steady leg, left< 1 second = selects steady leg> 8 seconds + button "4" = activates the system after system shutdown
4(Fig. 31,3)Rear steady leg, right< 1 second = selects steady leg> 8 seconds + button "3" = activates the system after system shutdown

Activating:

■ Park vehicle on even and stable ground and secure against rolling.
■ Switch on ignition. Green LED (Fig. 30,2) flashes for approx. 6 seconds, acoustic signal sounds.
■ Check LED indicator.

Extending: ■ Select steady leg.

■ Briefly press the "DOWN" button (Fig. 31,1). Steady leg swings downwards and extends.
■ Shortly before the steady leg reaches the ground, press the "DOWN" button again. The procedure is stopped.
■ Extend all four steady legs in the same way.
■ Press buttons "1" (Fig. 31,5) and "2" (Fig. 31,2) for a few seconds. Vehicle is automatically aligned horizontally.
■ Check if all the steady legs are touching the ground.
■ If necessary, select a steady leg and extend to the ground with the "DOWN" button.

Retracting: ■ Select steady leg.

■ Briefly press the "UP" button (Fig. 31,6). Steady leg retracts and swings upwards. When the end position has been reached, the system stops automatically.

■ Retract all four steady legs in the same way.

Emergency operation:

■ Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling.
■ Lift vehicle using the vehicle jack until the steady leg is clear of the ground.
■ Move steady leg back and fix to chassis.
■ Contact customer service.

6.4.4 Electrical-hydraulic steady legs

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Electrical-hydraulic steady legs - 1

The engine can be started (in order to charge the batteries) even if the steady legs are extended. Before moving off, always check that the steady legs are retracted completely (observe warning light and warning tone).
▶ Only extend or retract the steady legs if the lifting area and the area around the legs are clear of obstacles.
There must be no persons or animals close by when the system is in operation. The system is under high pressure. Escaping fluids can cause serious injury.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Electrical-hydraulic steady legs - 2

▷ Always apply the handbrake before operating the steady legs.
▷ Persons or animals inside the vehicle must remain still while the steady legs are being extended. Otherwise, the controller mechanism will be disturbed.
▶ Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Electrical-hydraulic steady legs - 3

AUTOMATIC LEVELING SYSTEM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 E&P AUTO READ MANUAL FIRST ZUERST HANDBUCH LESEN EES EERST DE GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING LIZES TOUTES LES INSTRUCTIONS DET00659

Fig. 32 Control unit, steady legs

1 Company logo
2 LED indicators (symbols)
3 On/Off switch
4 Manual operation button
5 Automatic operation button
6 Retract steady legs button
7 Front side button
8 Level LED
9 Right side button
10 Rear side button
11 Left side button

LED indicators

The LED indicators (Fig. 32,2) are only visible when the respective situation occurs. The following situations are indicated:

● Vehicle tilted too much (vehicle symbol)
● Battery voltage too low (battery symbol)
● Handbrake not applied (brake symbol)
● Steady leg not fully retracted (steady leg symbol)
● Manual operation activated (hand symbol)

Operation The steady legs can be extended manually or automatically. The zero point must be set prior to automatic extension.

Activating:

■ Park vehicle on even and stable ground and secure against rolling.
■ Apply the handbrake.
■ Switch on ignition.

Setting the zero point:

■ Align the vehicle manually using a spirit level.
■ Press the On/Off switch (Fig. 32,3).
■ Press the front side button (Fig. 32,7) five times.
■ Press the rear side button (Fig. 32,10) five times. All LEDs flash.
■ Press the retract steady legs button (Fig. 32,6) three times and wait for 20 seconds. The zero point is now saved.

Extending the steady legs automatically:

■ Activate the system.
■ Press the On/Off switch (Fig. 32,3). The LED with the company logo (Fig. 32,1) lights up.
■ Press the automatic operation button (Fig. 32,5). When the green level LED (Fig. 32,8) lights up, the support process has been completed.
■ Press the On/Off switch (Fig. 32,3) to switch off the system.
▷ Always steady the vehicle at the front first.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Setting the zero point: - 1

Extending the steady legs manually:

■ Activate the system.
■ Press the On/Off switch (Fig. 32,3).
■ Press the manual operation button (Fig. 32,4) until the LEDs in the direction arrows light up.
■ Press the front side button (Fig. 32,7) until the steady legs reach the ground.
■ Press the rear side button (Fig. 32,10) until the steady legs reach the ground.
If the arrow is pointing towards the front side of the vehicle: Press the front side button (Fig. 32,7) until the arrow goes out.
If the arrow is pointing towards the rear side of the vehicle: Press the rear side button (Fig. 32,10) until the arrow goes out.
■ If the arrow is pointing towards the left side of the vehicle: Press the left side button (Fig. 32,11) until the arrow goes out and the level LED (Fig. 32,8) lights up.
If the arrow is pointing towards the right side of the vehicle: Press the right side button (Fig. 32,9) until the arrow goes out and the level LED (Fig. 32,8) lights up.
■ Press the On/Off switch (Fig. 32,3) to switch off the system.

Retracting the steady legs:

■ Press the On/Off switch (Fig. 32,3).
■ Briefly press the retract steady legs button (Fig. 32,6) (automatic operation) or keep it pressed until the steady legs are fully retracted (manual operation).
■ Press the On/Off switch (Fig. 32,3) to switch off the system.
■ Check whether all steady legs are fully retracted.

6.5 240 V connection

The vehicle can be connected to a 240 V power supply (see chapter 9).

6.6 Awning

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Awning - 1

▷ Retract the awning in strong wind, rain or snow.
In the case of light rain, shorten one of the support legs so that water can run off.
Only retract the awning when the fabric is dry. When the awning must be retracted while the fabric is still wet: Extend the awning as soon as possible, in order to dry out the fabric.
Before retracting, remove leaves and coarse dirt from the awning.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Awning - 2

▶ Only use the awning for protection against the sun.
Also read the manufacturer's instruction manual.

Advantages of the awning The advantages of an awning are:

• The awning provides shade.
- The awning creates a covered vestibule and thus expands the space.
- The vehicle thus becomes more homelike.

1 2 3 4 ONNISTOR DE T00586

1 Retracting
2 S t o p
3 Extending
4 Remote control

Fig. 33 Remote control

Putting up the awning:

■ Press the button (Fig. 33,3) on the remote control (Fig. 33,4). The awning extends.
■ When the awning is extended: Set up the brackets.

Retracting the awning:

■ Fold in the brackets.
■ Press the button (Fig. 33,1) on the remote control (Fig. 33,4). The awning retracts.

The movement of the awning can be stopped with the Stop button (Fig. 33,2).

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Awning - 4

Chapter overview

This chapter contains instructions about living in the vehicle.

The instructions address the following topics:

  • opening and closing the doors, the external flaps and the driver's cabin partition
    ● ventilation of the vehicle
  • opening and closing the windows and blinds
  • opening and closing the shades in the driver's cabin
  • opening and closing the skylights
  • rotating the seats
  • modifying the table surfaces
  • converting tables
  • operating the central locking on the kitchen unit
  • positioning the television
  • lamps
  • light switches
  • light control
    ● remote control for lighting and entrance step
    • extending the seating groups
  • use of the beds

7.1 Doors

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Doors - 1

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Doors - 2

▶ Only drive with locked doors.

  • Locking the doors can prevent them from opening of their own accord, e.g. during an accident.
  • Locked doors also prevent forced entry, e.g. when waiting at traffic lights. However, in an emergency, locked doors make it more difficult for helpers to enter the vehicle.
    ▷ When leaving the vehicle, always lock the doors.
    Depending on the model, the locks of the driver's and the front passenger's doors are part of the base vehicle. In this case, the opening and closing of the driver's door and the front passenger's door is described in the operating manual of the base vehicle.

7.1.1 Conversion door, outside

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Conversion door, outside - 1

natural_image Close-up of a white door with a black handle and two buttons, no visible text or symbols

Fig. 34 Door lock of conversion door, outside

Opening: ■ Insert the key into locking cylinder and turn until the door lock is unlatched.

■ Return the key to the central position and remove it.
■ Pull on the handle. The door is open.

Locking: ■ Insert the key into locking cylinder and turn until the door lock is engaged.

■ Return the key to the central position and remove it.

7.1.2 Conversion door, outside (Hartal)

PARTIA 1 2 BLUE00829

Fig. 35 Door lock of conversion door, outside

Opening: ■ Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 35,2) and turn until the door lock is unlatched.

■ Return the key to the central position and remove it.
■ Pull on the handle (Fig. 35,1). The door is open.

Locking: ■ Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 35,2) and turn until the door lock is engaged.

■ Return the key to the central position and remove it.

7.1.3 Conversion door, inside

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Conversion door, inside - 1

natural_image Medical illustration showing two views of a joint with labeled parts (1 and 2), no text or symbols present.

Fig. 36 Door lock of conversion door, inside, open

Opening: ■ Push the handle (Fig. 36,1).
Locking: ■ Push the lever (Fig. 36,2) down.

7.1.4 Conversion door, inside (Hartal)

1 2 BUE00830

Fig. 37 Door lock of conversion door, inside

Opening: ■ Pull on the handle (Fig. 37,1). The door lock is unlatched.
Locking: ■ Turn the safety knob (Fig. 37,2) in a clockwise direction.

7.1.5 Window conversion door

The conversion door window is fitted with an insect screen and blind.

1 2 3 BUE00720

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Window conversion door - 2

natural_image Close-up of a metallic mechanical component mounted on a flat surface, with no visible text or symbols.

Fig. 38 Window in the conversion door Fig. 39 Blind

Opening the window:
■ Press the retainer (Fig. 38,3) back.
■ Press the handle (Fig. 38,2) together and push the window down.

Closing the window:

■ Push the window up until the handle (Fig. 38,2) engages in the lock (Fig. 38,1).

Insect screen To close and open the insect screen:

Closing:

- Grasp the bottom rod of the insect screen and guide it to the bottom rod of the blind.

■ Lock catch in place.

■ Continuous adjustment of the blinds may be made by moving the bottom rods.

Opening:

■ Hold the bottom rod of the insect screen and activate the catch.

■ Return the bottom rod of the insect screen to the limit stop on the screen.

7.1.6 Window of conversion door (Hartal)

The conversion door window is fitted with a Roman shade.

1 2 BLUE00831

Fig. 40 Roman shade

Closing:

- Grip the Roman shade (Fig. 40,2) in the middle of the bar (Fig. 40,1), pull it upwards and then release it at the desired height. The Roman shade will stay at this height.

Opening:

■ Grip the Roman shade in the middle of the bar and push it down.

7.1.7 Folding insect screen on the conversion door

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Folding insect screen on the conversion door - 1

▷ Open the insect screen completely before closing the conversion door.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Folding insect screen on the conversion door - 2

natural_image Close-up of a door frame with ventilation duct and a numbered label (1), no readable text or symbols beyond the label.

Fig. 41 Insect screen

Closing: ■ Pull out the insect screen completely by the bar (Fig. 41,1).

Opening: ■ Push the insect screen into its initial position by the bar (Fig. 41,1).

7.2 External flaps

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - External flaps - 1

Before commencing the journey, close all external flaps and lock them. To open and close the external flap, open or close all locks that are fitted to the external flap.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - External flaps - 2

▷ When leaving the vehicle, close all external flaps.

The external flaps fitted to the vehicle are all fitted with identical locking cylinders. Therefore, all locks can be opened with a single key.

7.2.1 Flap lock with recessed handle

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Flap lock with recessed handle - 1

To open the external flap, pull all the lock handles fitted to that particular external flap at the same time.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Flap lock with recessed handle - 2

natural_image Close-up of a D-shaped electronic device with labeled ports (no text or symbols beyond labels)

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Flap lock with recessed handle - 3

natural_image Exterior view of a white vehicle door with two labeled parts (1 and 2), no visible text or symbols on the main body.

Fig. 42 Flap lock with recessed handle Fig. 43 External flap, open

Opening: ■ Insert key into locking cylinder (Fig. 42,1) and turn a quarter turn. The flap lock is unlatched.
■ Remove the key.
■ Pull on the lock handle (Fig. 42,2). The external flap is open.
■ Swivel the external flap upwards and hold it.

■ Pull out the lever (Fig. 43,2) and turn it upwards a quarter turn.
■ Lean the external flap (Fig. 43,1) against the lever.

Closing:

■ Hold the external flap (Fig. 43,1).
■ Turn the lever (Fig. 43,2) down a quarter turn and push it in.
■ Firmly close the external flap.
■ Insert key into locking cylinder and turn a quarter turn. The flap lock is locked.
■ Remove the key.

7.2.2 Flap lock with separate locking cylinder

In the case of models fitted with central locking systems, the flap lock is connected to the central locking system.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Flap lock with separate locking cylinder - 1

natural_image Interior view of a car air vent or intake manifold with labeled parts (1 and 2), no visible text or symbols beyond labels.

Fig. 44 Flap lock with separate locking cylinder

2 1 DE T00588

Fig. 45 External flap, open

Opening:

■ Pull on the lock handle (Fig. 44,1). The external flap swings up and is held in place by the gas pressure spring (Fig. 45).

Proceed as follows when the external flap is locked:

■ Fold up the cover (Fig. 44,2).
■ Insert key into locking cylinder and turn a quarter turn. The flap lock is unlatched.
■ Remove the key.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Opening: - 1

In the final phase of closing, the external flap drops down automatically due to its weight. When closing, do not hold the external flap at the edge. There is a risk of crushing your hands.

Closing:

■ Press down the external flap (Fig. 45,2) against the resistance of the gas pressure spring (Fig. 45,1).
■ Firmly close the external flap.

Proceed as follows when the external flap is to be locked:

■ Fold up the cover (Fig. 44,2).
■ Insert key into locking cylinder and turn a quarter turn. The flap lock is locked.
■ Remove the key.

7.2.3 Sliding drawer

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Sliding drawer - 1

Do not place loads weighing more than 40 kg into the sliding drawer.
Always fasten the boxes with the tension belts before commencing the journey.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Sliding drawer - 2

natural_image Interior view of a vehicle showing a battery pack with labeled parts (1, 2, 3), no visible text or symbols beyond labels.

Fig. 46 Sliding drawer

Opening: ■ Open the external flap as described above.

■ Pull the safeguard (Fig. 46,1) upwards.
■ Pull out the sliding drawer (Fig. 46,2).
■ Loosen the tension belts (Fig. 46,3).

7.3 Driver's cabin partition

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Driver's cabin partition - 1

▷ Only drive with the door secured.

1 2 DET00190

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Driver's cabin partition - 3

natural_image Close-up of two metallic door lockers on a surface, labeled 1 and 2, with no visible text or symbols beyond labels.

Fig. 47 Driver's cabin partition Fig. 48 Driver's cabin lock

Lock on the living area side

To close and open the driver's cabin partition:

Closing:

■ Release and close door (Fig. 47,1).
■ Turn the handle (Fig. 47,2) in an anticlockwise direction until the door is locked.

Opening:

■ Turn the handle (Fig. 47,2) in a clockwise direction until the door is unlocked.

■ Open the door (Fig. 47,1) and secure it.

Lock on the driver's cabin side

To close and open the driver's cabin partition:

Closing:

■ Release the door (Fig. 47,1) and close it with the handle (Fig. 48,2).

■ Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 48,1) and turn in a clockwise direction until the door is locked.

Opening:

■ Insert key into locking cylinder and turn it in an anticlockwise direction.

■ Open the door and secure it.

7.4 Ventilation

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Ventilation - 1

The oxygen in the vehicle interior is used up by breathing and the use of gas operated appliances. That is why the oxygen needs to be replaced on a constant basis. For this purpose, forced ventilation options (e.g. skylights with forced ventilation, mushroom-shaped vents or floor vents) are fitted to the vehicle. Never cover or block forced ventilations from the inside or outside with objects such as e.g. a winter mat. Keep forced ventilations clear of snow and leaves. There is a danger of suffocation due to increased CO_2 levels.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Ventilation - 2

Although sufficient ventilation is provided, in certain weather conditions, condensation can form on metal objects (e.g. screwed connections in the floor). Additional cold spots can occur at thermal "bridges" (e.g. mushroom-shaped vents, skylight edges, sockets, filler necks, flaps, etc.).

Condensation

Ensure that there is a continuous exchange of air by providing frequent and efficient ventilation. This is the only method for ensuring that condensation and resulting mould is not formed during cool weather. During the colder season, a pleasant living climate is created if heating output, air distribution and ventilation are synchronized. To avoid draft close the air outlet nozzles on the dashboard and set the air distribution of the base vehicle to air circulation.

If the vehicle is laid up for a longer period, occasionally ventilate it well, especially in summer as heat accumulation can occur. Do not only air the interior, but also the storage compartments which are accessible from the outside. Air the parking place as well if the vehicle is parked in a closed space (e.g. garage). The occurrence of condensation could lead to the formation of mould.

7.5 Windows

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Windows - 1

The windows are fitted with a blind or Roman shade and with an insect screen or folding insect screen. After the latch has been released, the blind and insect screen automatically spring back to the initial position by tensile force. In order not to damage the tension mechanics, hold onto the blind or insect screen and allow it to slowly return to the initial position. The Roman shade and folding insect screen are made of thin woven fabric. In order not to damage the Roman shade or the insect screen, grasp the respective handle and carefully return it to the initial position.

Do not keep blinds closed over a longer period of time as that can cause increased material wear.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Windows - 2

If the blind or the Roman shade is completely closed, exposure to direct sunlight can cause heat to accumulate between the blind/the Roman shade and the glass window. The window could be damaged. For that reason, close the blind/Roman shade only 2/3 of the way in direct sunlight.
Before commencing the journey, close the windows.
▷ Depending on the weather, close the windows far enough to prevent moisture from entering.
To open and close the hinged window, open or close all catch levers which are fitted to the hinged window.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Windows - 3

▷ When leaving the vehicle, always close the windows.
In extreme weather conditions or if the temperature fluctuates strongly, a light condensation film can form on the double-glazed acrylic glass. The glass is designed in such a way that condensation can evaporate when the external temperature increases. There is no danger of the double-glazed acrylic glass being damaged by condensation.

7.5.1 Hinged window with automatic hinges (with safety knob)

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Hinged window with automatic hinges (with safety knob) - 1

▷ Open the window completely, to release the lock. If the locking device is not released and the window is closed nevertheless, there is the danger of the window breaking due to the massive counter-pressure.
When opening the hinged windows, ensure that there are no torsional forces. Open and close the hinged windows evenly.
If the catch lever is equipped with a safety knob, press the safety knob when operating the catch lever.

1 2 3 4 HYW07468

Fig. 49 Catch lever with safety knob in "closed" position

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Hinged window with automatic hinges (with safety knob) - 3

natural_image Close-up of a mechanical hinge or latch mechanism with no visible text or symbols

Fig. 50 Hinged window with automatic hinges

Opening:

■ Press the safety knob (Fig. 49,3) down and hold it.
■ Turn the catch lever (Fig. 49,4) a quarter turn towards the centre of the window.
■ Open the hinged window until the required locking position is reached; the automatic hinge (Fig. 50,1) automatically locks in place.

The hinged window remains locked in the required position.

Closing:

■ Open the hinged window as wide as necessary until the latch releases.
■ Close the hinged window.
■ Press the safety knob (Fig. 49,3) down and hold it.
■ Turn the catch lever (Fig. 49,4) a quarter turn towards the window frame. The fork (Fig. 49,2) on the catch lever is entirely on the inner side of the window catch (Fig. 49,1).

1 2 3 4 HYW07470

Fig. 51 Catch lever with safety knob in "continuous ventilation" position

Continuous ventilation

With the catch lever, the hinged window can be placed in two positions:

• "Continuous ventilation" (Fig. 51)
- Firmly closed (Fig. 49)

To place the hinged window into the "continuous ventilation" position:

■ Press the safety knob (Fig. 51,3) down and hold it.
■ Turn the catch lever (Fig. 51,4) a quarter turn towards the centre of the window.
■ Lightly open the hinged window outwards.
■ Press the safety knob (Fig. 51,3) down and hold it.
■ Return catch lever to its initial position. Move the fork (Fig. 51,2) on the catch lever into the window catch (Fig. 51,1).
■ Make certain that the safety knob is not pushed in but rather that it secures the catch lever.

During the journey, the hinged window may not be in "continuous ventilation" position.

If it rains, the "continuous ventilation" hinged window position could lead to splashing water penetrating the living area. Therefore, close the hinged windows completely.

7.5.2 Sliding window with lock

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Sliding window with lock - 1

natural_image Mechanical component with two labeled parts (1 and 2) mounted on a vertical frame, no visible text or symbols beyond labels

Fig. 52 Sliding window with pressure lock

Opening:

■ Press the lock (Fig. 52,2) upwards.
■ Press handle (Fig. 52,1) and push it forward or backward at the same time.
■ Open window half up to the required position.

Closing: ■ Close the window as far as it can go.

■ Push the lock downwards.

7.5.3 Sliding window without lock

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Sliding window without lock - 1

natural_image Close-up of a black rectangular device mounted on a vertical pole, with a scale marker and 'DE T00589' label (no readable text or symbols beyond the label)

Fig. 53 Sliding window without lock

Opening: ■ Press handle (Fig. 53,1) and push or pull it forward at the same time.

■ Open window half up to the required position.

Closing: ■ Close the window as far as possible and let the handle lock in place.

7.5.4 Gathered blinds

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Gathered blinds - 1

natural_image Interior view of a train carriage with wooden doors, curtains, and ventilation ducts (no visible text or symbols)

Fig. 54 Gathered blind Fig. 55 Cord weight

2 1 DE 100591

Depending on the model, the vehicle is fitted with gathered blinds.

Gathering the blind: ■ Pull down the cord weight (Fig. 54,1). The cords pull up and gather the blind.
■ Press the cord weight (Fig. 55,2) onto the Velcro (Fig. 55,1).
Lowering the blind: ■ Remove the the cord weight (Fig. 55,2) from the Velcro (Fig. 55,1). ■ Guide the cord weight slowly upwards. The bottom rod pulls the blind down.

7.5.5 Blind and insect screen

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Blind and insect screen - 1

Depending on the window size, the blinds are fitted with one or two lock mechanisms.
Before commencing the journey, lock the insect screen into the blind and lock the blind into the first locking position. This helps to avoid vibration noises during the journey.

The windows are fitted with a blind and an insect screen. The blind and insect screen can be adjusted separately.

1 2 1 3 4 5 4 3 DET00015

Fig. 56 Hinged window

Blind The blind is located in the bottom blind box.

Closing: ■ Press handle (Fig. 56,4) and draw blind (Fig. 56,5) from the bottom to the top up to the desired height.

■ Release handle. Blind locks into the nearest locking position.

Opening: ■ Clench handle (Fig. 56,4). Latch is released.

■ Slowly guide blind (Fig. 56,5) into its initial position.

Insect screen The insect screen is located in the upper blind box.

Closing: ■ Pull insect screen (Fig. 56,2) down until it touches the blind (Fig. 56,5). ■ Depending on the model, engage the closure latches (Fig. 56,1) or the one closure latch in the locks (Fig. 56,3) or the one lock.

Opening: ■ Depending on the model, release both locks (Fig. 56,3) or the one lock.

■ Slowly return insect screen into its initial position.

7.5.6 Roman shade and insect screen

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Roman shade and insect screen - 1

natural_image Close-up of a window with horizontal slats and a textured surface, no visible text or symbols

Fig. 57 Hinged window

Insect screen Depending on the frame fitting, the insect screen is fitted into the window frame at the top or bottom.

Closing:

■ Hold the bottom rod of the insect screen in the centre and pull it down carefully towards the bottom rod of the Roman shade.
■ Let the catch on the bottom rod of the insect screen snap into the Roman shade.
■ Continuous adjustment of the insect screen may be made by moving the bottom rods.

Opening:

■ Push the bottom rods towards the Roman shade.
■ Hold the bottom rod of the insect screen in the middle and activate the catch.
■ Carefully return the bottom rod of the insect screen to the limit stop on the frame.

Roman shade Depending on the frame fitting, the Roman shade is fitted into the window frame at the top or bottom.

Closing:

■ Hold the bottom rod of the Roman shade in the centre and pull it carefully towards the bottom rod of the insect screen.
■ Let the catch on the bottom rod of the Roman shade snap into the insect screen.
■ Continuous adjustment of the Roman shade may be made by moving the bottom rods.

Opening:

■ Push the bottom rods towards the insect screen.
■ Hold the bottom rod of the Roman shade in the centre and activate the catch on the bottom rod of the insect screen.
■ Carefully return the bottom rod of the Roman shade to the limit stop on the frame.

7.5.7 Blind for the windscreen

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Blind for the windscreen - 1

natural_image Close-up of a mechanical component with layered structure and mounting bracket (no visible text or symbols)

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Blind for the windscreen - 2

natural_image Interior view of a door with two panels, one showing a circular button and arrow indicator (no text or symbols)

Fig. 58 Blind, windscreen Fig. 59 Switch for blind, windscreen

The switch for operating the blind is installed in the panelling on the left next to the driver's seat.

Closing:

■ Press the left button (Fig. 59,2). The blind (Fig. 58,1) moves down.

Opening:

■ Press the right button (Fig. 59,1). The blind (Fig. 58,1) moves up.

7.5.8 Roman shades for driver's window and front passenger's window

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Roman shades for driver's window and front passenger's window - 1

natural_image Close-up of a vertical pipe or tube mounted on a wall, with two numbered labels (1 and 2) visible, against a plain background (no text or symbols beyond labels)

Fig. 60 Roman shade, driver's cabin window

Closing:

■ Grasp the handle (Fig. 60,2) of the Roman shades and draw carefully until the magnetic catch keeps the Roman shades closed.

Opening:

■ Using the handle, carefully push back the Roman shades.

■ Push the handle (Fig. 60,2) onto the cap (Fig. 60,1). The Roman shade is secured.

7.6 Skylights

Depending on the model, skylights with or without forced ventilation are fitted to the vehicle. If a skylight is fitted without forced ventilation, the forced ventilation is performed using mushroom-shaped vents.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Skylights - 1

The apertures for forced ventilation must always be kept open. Never cover or block forced ventilations with objects such as e.g. a winter mat. Keep forced ventilations clear of snow and leaves.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Skylights - 2

The skylights are fitted with a blind or Roman shade and with an insect screen or folding insect screen. After the latch has been released, the blind and insect screen automatically spring back to the initial position by tensile force. In order not to damage the tension mechanics, hold onto the blind or insect screen and allow it to slowly return to the initial position. The Roman shade and folding insect screen are made of thin woven fabric. In order not to damage the Roman shade or the insect screen, grasp the respective handle and carefully return it to the initial position.

Do not keep blinds closed over a longer period of time as that can cause increased material wear.

If the blind or the Roman shade is completely closed, exposure to direct sunlight can cause heat to accumulate between the blind/the Roman shade and the skylight. The skylight could be damaged. For that reason, close the blind/Roman shade only 2/3 of the way in direct sunlight. Open the skylight slightly or move it to ventilation position.

▷ Depending on the weather, close the skylights far enough to prevent moisture from entering.

Do not climb on the skylights.

▷ Before commencing the journey, close the skylights.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Skylights - 3

Before commencing the journey, check that the skylights are closed and locked.
Before commencing the journey, open the blinds or Roman shades.
▶ Apply talc to the rubber seals of the skylights at least once a year.
▷ When leaving the vehicle, always close the skylights.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Skylights - 4

7.6.1 Skylight with snap latch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DE T00594

Fig. 61 Skylight with snap latch

The skylight can be pushed upwards either from one side or from both sides.

Opening:

■ Pull on the handle (Fig. 61,5).
■ Fold insect screen (Fig. 61,4) downward.
■ Push the spring-loaded latch (Fig. 61,1) towards the inside of the skylight (Fig. 61,8). At the same time use the handle (Fig. 61,2) to press the skylight upwards.
■ Swing insect screen upwards (Fig. 61,4) until it latches in place.

Closing:

■ Pull on the handle (Fig. 61,5).
■ Fold insect screen (Fig. 61,4) downward.
■ Using both handles (Fig. 61,2), pull down the skylight (Fig. 61,8) with force until the two snap latches (Fig. 61,1) lock into place.
■ Swing insect screen upwards (Fig. 61,4) until it latches in place.

Blind To close and open the blind:

Closing:

■ Pull the handle (Fig. 61,7) of the blind and hook the hook rail (Fig. 61,3) into the retainer (Fig. 61,6) on the insect screen.

Opening:

■ Release the hook rail (Fig. 61,3) from the retainer (Fig. 61,6) and feed the blind back slowly.

7.6.2 Hinged skylight

The hinged skylight may be opened on one side only. Three inclination angles and a ventilation position are available.

An extension hook is included as standard equipment.

1 4 3 2 BUE00687

1 2 3 DET00162

Fig. 62 Hinged skylight, lock Fig. 63 Hinged skylight

Opening:

■ Turn the lever (Fig. 62,1 or Fig. 63,3) one quarter turn.

■ Grip lever and push hinged skylight upwards.

Closing:

■ Grip lever and pull hinged skylight downwards.

■ Turn the lever one quarter turn. The latch (Fig. 62,4) must slide into the lower aperture (Fig. 62,3).

Locking in the ventilation position:

■ Grip lever and pull hinged skylight downwards.

■ Turn the lever one quarter turn. The latch (Fig. 62,4) must slide into the upper aperture (Fig. 62,2).

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Hinged skylight - 3

▷ If it rains and the hinged skylight is in ventilation position, that could lead to water penetrating the living area. Therefore close hinged skylight completely.

Roman shade The Roman shade may be closed at any position, either with the hinged sky-light open or closed.

Closing:

■ Pull out Roman shade (Fig. 63,1) and release in the required position. The Roman shade will stay in that position.

Opening:

■ Slowly push the Roman shade at the handle to its initial position.

Insect screen

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Insect screen - 1

The insect screen may be damaged if it is closed with the hinged skylight closed. Therefore only close the insect screen when the hinged skylight is open.

Closing:

■ Pull insect screen (Fig. 63,2) out until it engages with the latch on the opposite side.

Opening:

■ Slightly push up insect screen along the strip. The latch is released.

■ Slowly return insect screen into its initial position.

7.6.3 Heki skylight (mini and midi)

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Heki skylight (mini and midi) - 1

natural_image Close-up of a mechanical component with two labeled parts (1 and 2), no readable text or symbols beyond labels

Fig. 64 Safety knob on the Heki sky-light

1 2 3 BLUE00523

Fig. 65 Heki skylight, guide

The Heki skylight is opened on one side only.

Opening:

■ Press the safety knob (Fig. 64,2) and pull the bar (Fig. 64,1) down with both hands.

■ Pull the bar (Fig. 65,1) in the guides (Fig. 65,2) to the rearmost position (Fig. 65,3).

Closing:

■ Use both hands to push the bar (Fig. 65,1) slightly upwards.
■ Push the bar back in the guides.
■ Push the bar upwards with both hands until it is above the safety knob (Fig. 64,2).

1 2 BUE00524

Fig. 66 Heki skylight in ventilation position

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Closing: - 2

natural_image Close-up of a mechanical component with a 3D outline and a vertical rod, no visible text or symbols

Fig. 67 Ventilation position locking mechanism

Ventilation position

The Heki skylight can be put in two ventilation positions: Bad weather position (Fig. 66,1) and central position (Fig. 66,2). Depending on the model, the skylight can be locked in the central position with the latch (Fig. 67,1).

■ Press the safety knob (Fig. 64,2) and pull the bar (Fig. 64,1) down with both hands.
■ Pull the bar in the guides (Fig. 65,2) to the desired position.
■ Push the bar slightly upwards and into the selected guide (Fig. 66,1 or 2) and lock if necessary.

Roman shade To close and open the Roman shade:

Closing:

■ Pull out Roman shade at the handle and release in the required position. The Roman shade will stay in that position.

Opening: ■ Slowly push the Roman shade at the handle to its initial position.

Insect screen To close and open the insect screen:

Closing: ■ Pull the insect screen by the handle to the opposite handle of the Roman shade.

Opening: ■ Press the rear part of the handle of the insect screen. The latch is released.

■ Use handle to return the insect screen slowly to its initial position.

7.6.4 Wind-up skylight

1 2 3 BUE00033

Fig. 68 Wind-up skylight

The wind-up skylight can be opened using the manual crank.

Opening: ■ Rotate the hand crank (Fig. 68,2) until a resistance can be felt (max. opening angle 70°).

Closing: ■ Rotate the hand crank until the wind-up skylight is closed. The wind-up skylight can be locked after rotating two or three more times.

- Check the locking mechanism. To do so, press your hand against the acrylic glass.

Roman shade The Roman shade can be closed in any position, as desired. If the Roman shade is locked with the insect screen, the insect screen is also moved along on closing the Roman shade.

Closing: ■ Pull the handle of the Roman shade (Fig. 68,3) and release in the desired position. The Roman shade will stay in that position.

Opening: ■ Slowly push the Roman shade at the handle to its initial position.

Insect screen If the insect screen is locked with the Roman shade, the Roman shade is also moved along on closing the insect screen.

Closing: ■ Pull insect screen at the handle (Fig. 68,1) to the opposite handle of the Roman shade (Fig. 68,3) and allow to engage.

Opening: ■ Press the handle of the insect screen (Fig. 68,1) at the back upwards and detach the insect screen from the Roman shade (Fig. 68,3).

■ Slowly push insect screen at the handle to its initial position.

7.7 Rotating seats

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Rotating seats - 1

Before commencing the journey, rotate all swivel seats in the direction of travel and lock in position. During the journey, the swivel seats must remain locked in place in the direction of travel.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Rotating seats - 2

Setting the position of the seats and armrests is described in chapter 5.

The lever for rotating the seat is located on the front of the seat.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Rotating seats - 3

natural_image Interior view of a car seat with visible seats and a tool inserted, no text or symbols present.

Fig. 69 Driver's and front passenger's seats (SKA)

Turning:

■ Push both armrests at the driver's/front passenger's seat upward.
■ Push the driver's seat/front passenger's seat backwards or into the central position.
■ Pull the lever (Fig. 69,1) to turn the seat. The seat is released from the locking device.

The seats can be rotated in any direction. The seats can only be locked in position in the direction of travel.

7.8 Tables

7.8.1 Suspension table with folding table-top extension

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DETO0394

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Suspension table with folding table-top extension - 2

natural_image Close-up of a mechanical component with a knob and textured surface, labeled '1' (no readable text or symbols beyond label)

Fig. 70 Extend suspension table Fig. 71 Suspension table with fold-out leg

The table surface of the suspension table size can be enlarged by folding out a table element.

Extending:

■ Release the locking lever (Fig. 70,4) underneath the table-top.
■ Slightly lift the front of the table-top (Fig. 70,3) and pull it to the middle of the vehicle as far as it will go.
■ The inserted table-top extension (Fig. 70,8) pivots upwards.
■ Push the table-tops together until the catch audibly locks into place.

Reducing size:

■ Release the locking lever (Fig. 70,4) underneath the table-top.

■ Slightly lift the front of the table-top and pull it out completely.

■ Push back the table-top. The table-top extension pivots downwards.

■ Lift up the front of the table-top slightly and push it all the way in.

The suspension table may also be used as a bed foundation.

Conversion to bed foundation:

■ Lift the front of the table-top by approx. 45°.
■ Pull out the lower part of the support leg (Fig. 70,6) down and lay aside.
■ Press the release knob (Fig. 71,1) on the lock (Fig. 70,2)
■ Detach the suspension table from the upper attachment rail (Fig. 70,1).
■ Hook the suspension table into the lower attachment rail (Fig. 70,7) and set it down onto the floor with the upper part of the support leg (Fig. 70,5).

7.8.2 Fixed table (movable table-top)

The top of the fixed table can be moved both lengthways and crossways.

3 2 1 BUE00722

Fig. 72 Fixed table

Moving in a lengthways direction:

■ Loosen knurled screw (Fig. 72,1).
■ Move table-top (Fig. 72,2) to the desired position.
■ Retighten the knurled screw.

Moving in a crossways direction:

■ Loosen knurled screw (Fig. 72,3).
■ Move table-top (Fig. 72,2) to the desired position.
■ Retighten the knurled screw.

The fixed table cannot be used as a bed foundation.

7.9 Central locking system for kitchen unit

Depending on the model, the kitchen unit is fitted with a central locking system. When you start the vehicle engine, the central locking system is activated automatically.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Central locking system for kitchen unit - 1

natural_image Close-up of a mechanical component with labeled parts (1 and 2), no readable text or symbols beyond labels

Fig. 73 Switch for the kitchen unit's central locking system

1 Panel

2 Switch for the kitchen unit's central locking system

Unlocking:

■ Push the panel (Fig. 73,1) to the side.
■ Press the upper part of the switch (Fig. 73,2). The flaps and drawers of the kitchen unit are unlocked.
■ Push the panel (Fig. 73,1) to the side.
■ Press the lower part of the switch (Fig. 73,2). The flaps and drawers of the kitchen unit are locked.

Locking manually:

7.10 Television

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Television - 1

Before commencing the journey, remove the television from the support and store it securely.
Before commencing the journey, place and secure the flat screen and screen support in the initial position. If the screen holder is installed in a TV cabinet: Close TV cabinet.
Before commencing the journey, ensure that the antenna is in park position. Danger of accidents!

Flat screen in the TV cabinet

The flat screen is attached to a console in the TV cabinet.

1 2 3 4 5 DE T00345

Fig. 74 TV cabinet

Pulling the television console forward:

Swivelling the television console:

■ Press the release knob (Fig. 74,5) and pull the holder for the flat screen forward as far as possible by the handle (Fig. 74,4).
■ Pull the release knob (Fig. 74,1) and swivel flat screen (Fig. 74,2) to the desired position.
■ Loosen knurled screw (Fig. 74,3).
■ Set the desired angle for the flat screen and re-tighten the knurled screw.

Flat screen with jointed arm

The flat screen is fastened to a jointed arm.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Flat screen with jointed arm - 1

natural_image 3D mechanical assembly diagram showing internal components and labeled parts (no readable text or symbols)

Fig. 75 Flat screen with jointed arm

Positioning the flat screen with jointed arm:

■ Pull on the fabric strip (Fig. 75,3) to unlock the jointed arm (Fig. 75,2).
■ Swivel flat screen (Fig. 75,1) into the required position.
■ Take hold of the flat screen at the top and bottom edge with both hands and set the desired angle of inclination.

7.11 Lamps

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Lamps - 1

▶ Bulbs and light fittings can be extremely hot.
▶ Allow the light bulbs and lamp holders to cool down before touching them.
If the light is switched on or still hot, there must always be a safety distance of at least 30 cm between stores or curtains and flammable objects. Fire hazard!

Spotlight The spotlight can be both swivelled and pushed.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Lamps - 2

natural_image Mechanical assembly diagram showing a rotating component with directional arrows, no text or symbols present

Fig. 76 Spotlight

Swivelling the spotlight:

■ Grasp the housing (Fig. 76,2) and swivel it.
The spotlight can be swivelled in various directions:

• To the left and to the right
- Up and down

Shifting spotlight:

■ Grasp the holder (Fig. 76,1).
■ Push spotlight along the rail system to desired position.

Plug-in light

The plug-in lights can be plugged into the sockets provided. The sockets are distributed throughout the vehicle.

1 2 3 4 5 DE T00596

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Plug-in light - 2

natural_image Close-up of a wall-mounted electrical socket with two labeled points (1 and 2), no visible text or symbols on the socket itself.

Fig. 77 Socket with plugged-in light Fig. 78 Socket

Removing a plug-in light:

■ Grip the plug-in light at the base (Fig. 77,3).

■ Push the release knob (Fig. 77,4).

■ Pull the plug-in light (Fig. 77,1) out of the socket (Fig. 77,5).

■ Insert the plug in the base of the plug-in light into the socket (Fig. 78,1) until it engages audibly. When doing this, pay attention to the position of the contacts (Fig. 78,2).

Plugging in the plug-in light:

Grip the plug-in light by the "swan neck" (Fig. 77,2) (if present) or by the housing, and swivel.

Swivelling the plug-in light:

7.12 Light switch

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Light switch - 1

The light switches have different layouts according to the model. The light switches are located either directly on the corresponding lamp or next to the lamp, e.g. in the vicinity of the seating group.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Light switch - 2

natural_image Two black electrical switches on a wooden surface, one with a circular button and the other with two circular buttons, labeled 1 and 2 (no text or symbols on the switches themselves)

Fig. 79 Light switch, entrance area

The bottom of the entrance area has light switches for the following lamps:

- Awning light (Fig. 79,1)

- Seating group lighting (Fig. 79,2)

7.13 Light control

Functions

Depending on the model, the vehicle is fitted with a central lighting system. This lighting system operates and dims single lamps or lamp groups.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Functions - 1

natural_image Close-up of a rectangular electronic component with internal compartments and mounting holes (no visible text or symbols)

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Functions - 2

natural_image Close-up of a metallic panel with multiple small rectangular cutouts, mounted on a dark square frame (no visible text or symbols)

Fig. 80 Light switch with four buttons Fig. 81 Light switch with eight buttons

Switch The lights are operated via switches which are installed at different places in the vehicle. The switches each have two, four (Fig. 80) or eight (Fig. 81) buttons. Not all functions are available on each switch. The functions of the individual switches and buttons are programmed individually, depending on the configuration. A function is switched on and off via the same button.

7.14 Remote control for awning light, canopy light and entrance step

1 2 DET00201

Fig. 82 Remote control

The remote control has the following functions:

  • Switching the awning light on and off (Fig. 82,1)
  • Switching the canopy light on and off (Fig. 82,2)
    • Extending the entrance step
  • Retracting the entrance step

7.15 Extending the seating group

7.15.1 Extending the central seating group

1 2 3 2 1 4 4

1 2 8 DET00025

Fig. 83 Before extending

1 Back cushion
2 Seat cushion
3 Table
4 F I a p
5 Additional cushion
6 Additional cushion
7 Bench seat extension
8 Handle

5 1 6 2 3 6 2 5 1 7 7

5 6 1 2 7 4 DEFT00026

Fig. 84 After extending

■ Extend the table (Fig. 83,3) (see section 7.8).
■ Pull on the handle (Fig. 83,8) and open the flap (Fig. 83,4).
■ Fold up bench seat extension (Fig. 84,7) and wedge together with the flap (Fig. 84,4).
■ Place the back cushions (Fig. 84,1) and the seat cushions (Fig. 84,2) on the bench seat extension.
■ Insert the additional cushions (Fig. 84,6) between the seat cushions and the exterior wall.
■ Insert the additional cushions (Fig. 84,5) between the back cushions and the exterior wall.

7.15.2 Extending the central seating group with divan

Diagram showing three labeled components (2, 3) with layered structures and arrows indicating direction or flow.

1 3 DET00193

1 Handle
2 F I a p
3 Slatted frame
4 Bench seat extension
5 Additional cushion
6 Additional cushion

Fig. 85 Prior to conversion
4 3

4 3 2 DET00194

Fig. 86 During conversion

6 5

6 5 DET00195

Fig. 87 After conversion

■ Close driver's cabin partition (see section 7.3).
■ Pull on the handle (Fig. 85,1) and open the flap (Fig. 85,2).
■ Fold up bench seat extension (Fig. 86,4) and wedge together with the flap (Fig. 86,2).
■ Unlock and pull out the slatted frame (Fig. 86,3).
■ Place the additional cushion (Fig. 87,5) on the slatted frame and the bench seat extension.
■ Place the additional cushion (Fig. 87,6) on the additional cushion (Fig. 87,5).

7.16 Beds

7.16.1 Overcab bed

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Overcab bed - 1

The maximum permitted overcab bed load is 200 kg.
▶ Only use the overcab bed, if the safety net is set up.
▶ Never allow small children to remain in the overcab bed without supervision.
▶ But in particular with regard to small children less than 6 years of age, users should ensure that they cannot fall out of the overcab bed.
▶ Use separate children's beds or travel cots suitable for children.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Overcab bed - 2

Do not load the overcab bed without mattress. The plastic mould part can break!

1 2 3 DET00196

Fig. 88 Overcab bed

Access ladder Always use the access ladder provided as standard to access the overcab bed.

Safety net

The safety net (Fig. 88,3) is stored as standard between the mattress and slatted frame. Only use the safety net if persons are already in the alcove.

Setting up:

■ Fasten the retaining straps (Fig. 88,1) to the holders on the ceiling (Fig. 88,2).

Folding mechanism

The overcab bed can be folded up. This simplifies passage from driver's cabin to living area.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Folding mechanism - 1

natural_image Interior view of a vehicle cabin with seats and overhead equipment (no visible text or symbols)

Fig. 89 Overcab bed, folded upwards

Folding upwards:

■ Open driver's cabin partition (see section 7.3).
■ Lift the mattress forwards and set it down on the panel.
■ Fold the front of the overcab bed (Fig. 89,1) upwards. The overcab bed is kept in the upper position by gas-pressure springs.

Folding downwards:

■ Pull overcab bed downwards.
■ If necessary, push the mattress behind the panel.

7.16.2 Pull-down bed, electronically lowerable

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Pull-down bed, electronically lowerable - 1

The maximum permitted pull-down bed load is 200 kg.
The pull-down bed is not to be used for the storage of luggage.
▶ Only use the pull-down bed, if the safety net is set up.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Pull-down bed, electronically lowerable - 2

▶ Never allow small children to remain in the pull-down bed without supervision.
▶ But in particular with regard to small children less than 6 years of age, users should ensure that they cannot fall out of the pull-down bed.
▶ Use separate children's beds or travel cots suitable for children.
▶ Switch off the reading lamps in the pull-down bed before the bed is pushed up. Fire hazard!
▶ Depending on the seat model, the backrest is under strong spring tension. If there is no resistance to the backrest in these seats, it quickly moves forward after unlocking.
▶ Do not reach into the area between the bed and the side wall when lowering or raising. Danger of bruises!
▶ Only lower or raise the bed when the space between the bed and the side wall is clear.
▶ Only lower the bed if the area under the bed is clear.

Preparing the driver's cabin

The rests of the driver's and front passenger's seats must be tipped forwards before the pull-down bed is lowered.

■ Turn the driver's and the front passenger's seat to the direction of travel, lock it in place and move them backwards.
■ Tip the backrest forwards.
■ Close the shade in the driver's cabin.

1 2 DET00570

Fig. 90 Switch for pull-down bed

Lowering the pull-down bed:

■ Press the rocker switch (Fig. 90,1) above the divan, and keep it pressed until the bed is completely lowered.
■ Switch off the reading lamps in the pull-down bed.
■ Press the rocker switch (Fig. 90,2) above the divan, and keep it pressed until the bed is completely raised.

Moving the pull-down bed upwards:

Access ladder

Always use the access ladder provided as standard to access the pull-down bed.

Safety net

The safety net is stored as standard between the mattress and slatted frame. Only use the safety net if persons are already in the pull-down bed.

7.16.3 Fixed bed (gas-pressure springs)

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Fixed bed (gas-pressure springs) - 1

natural_image Close-up of a mechanical suspension rod mounted on a vehicle door frame (no visible text or symbols)

Fig. 91 Fixed bed

A storage compartment is underneath the bed. Lift up the slatted frame to place items in the storage compartment or to empty it from the inside of the vehicle.

Opening:

■ Lift the mattress forwards and set it down on the panel.

■ Lift slatted frame. The gas-pressure springs (Fig. 91,1) hold the slatted frame open.

Closing:

■ Press the slatted frame downwards against the resistance of the gas-pressure springs.

■ If necessary, push the mattress behind the panel.

7.17 Converting seating groups for sleeping

7.17.1 Central seating group

1 2 3 2 1

1 2 3 2 1 4 DET00229

1 Back cushion
2 Seat cushion
3 T a b l e
4 Mounting rail
5 Additional cushion

Fig. 92 Prior to conversion
3

3 01:00237

Fig. 93 During conversion

5 2 2 1

1 2 2 5 DET00547

Fig. 94 After conversion

■ Convert the table (Fig. 92,3) to a bed foundation (see section 7.8).
■ Pull the seat cushions (Fig. 94,2) into the centre.
■ Place the back cushion (Fig. 94,1) between the seat cushion and the wall.
■ Insert the additional cushion (Fig. 94,5) between the seat cushion and the wall.

7.17.2 Central seating group with extension

1 2 3 2 1 5 6 6 5

1 2 3 2 1 6 4 6 DET00648

Fig. 95 Prior to conversion

1 Back cushion
2 Seat cushion
3 T a b l e
4 Mounting rail
5 F I a p
6 Handle
7 Bench seat extension
8 Additional cushion
9 Additional cushion
10 Additional cushion

1 2 3 2 1 7 7

1 2 3 2 1 b DET00549

Fig. 96 During conversion

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Central seating group with extension - 5

bar_stacked | Category | Value 1 | Value 2 | |---|---|---| | Row 1 | 9 | 8 | | Row 2 | 10 | 2 | | Row 3 | 10 | 2 | | Row 4 | 9 | 1 |

1 2 2 8 DET00550

Fig. 97 After conversion

■ Convert the table (Fig. 95,3) to a bed foundation (see section 7.8).
■ Pull on the handle (Fig. 95,6) and open the flap (Fig. 95,5).
■ Fold up the bench seat extension (Fig. 96,7) and wedge it with the flap.
■ Pull the seat cushions (Fig. 97,2) forwards onto the table.
■ Place the back cushion (Fig. 97,1) between the seat cushion and the wall.
■ Insert the additional cushion (Fig. 97,8) between the seat cushion and the wall.
■ Insert the additional cushions (Fig. 97,9) between the cushions and the wall.
■ Insert the additional cushions (Fig. 97,10) between the cushions and the wall.

7.17.3 Central seating group with divan

3 2 1

1 2 3 DET00551

1 Back cushion
2 Seat cushion
3 Slatted frame
4 Additional cushion

Fig. 98 Prior to conversion
3 2 1

3 2 1 DET00552

Fig. 99 During conversion

2 4

2 4 DET00553

Fig. 100 After conversion

■ Extend the table and convert it into a bed foundation (see section 7.8).
■ Convert the central seating group for sleeping (see section 7.17.2).
■ Remove the back cushion (Fig. 99,1) and lay it aside.
■ Pull out the slatted frame (Fig. 99,3).
■ Pull the seat cushion (Fig. 100,2) to the central seating group.
■ Insert the additional cushion (Fig. 100,4) between the seat cushion and the exterior wall.

Chapter overview

This chapter contains instructions regarding the gas system of the vehicle.

The instructions address the following topics:

  • safety
  • gas consumption
  • changing the gas bottles
  • gas isolator taps
  • hose break guard
    • external gas connection
    • automatic switching facility

The operation of the gas operation appliances of the vehicle is described in chapter 10.

8.1 General

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - General - 1

Before commencing the journey, when leaving the vehicle or when gas equipment is not in use, close all gas isolator taps and the main isolator tap on the gas bottle.
▶ No appliance operated by a naked flame (e.g. heater or refrigerator) may be in operation when filling the tank, on ferries or in the garage. Danger of explosion!
▶ Do not use appliances operated with a naked flame in closed spaces (e.g. garages). Danger of poisoning and suffocation!
▶ Only have the gas system maintained, repaired or altered by an authorised specialist workshop.
▶ Have the gas system checked by an authorised specialist workshop according to the national regulations before commissioning. This also applies for not registered vehicles. For modifications to the gas system have the gas system immediately checked by an authorised specialist workshop.
The gas pressure regulator and exhaust gas pipes must also be inspected. The gas pressure regulator has to be replaced after 10 years at the latest. The vehicle owner is responsible for seeing that this is carried out.
In case of a defect of the gas system (gas odour, high gas consumption) there is danger of explosion! Close regulator tap on the gas bottle immediately. Open doors and windows and ventilate well.
If the gas system is defective: Do not smoke; do not ignite any open flames, and do not operate electric switches (light switches etc.).
▶ Before using the cooker make sure that there is sufficient ventilation. Open windows or the skylight.
▶ Do not use the gas cooker or gas oven for heating purposes.
If there are several gas devices, each gas device must have its own gas isolator tap. If individual gas devices are not in use, close the respective gas isolator tap.
▶ Ignition safety valves must close within 1 minute after the gas flame has extinguished. A clicking sound is audible. Check function from time to time.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - General - 2

The built-in gas devices are exclusively meant for use with propane or butane gas or a mixture of both. The gas pressure regulator as well as all built-in gas devices are designed for a gas pressure of 30 mbar.
▶ Propane gas is capable of gasification up to -42^ , whereas butane gas gasifies at 0^ . Below these temperatures no gas pressure is available. Butane gas is unsuitable for use in winter.
▶ Regularly inspect the gas tube fitted to the gas bottle connection for tightness. The gas tube must not have any tears and must not be porous. Have the gas tube replaced by an authorised specialist workshop no later than ten years after the manufacturing date. The operator of the gas system must see to it that the parts are replaced.
▶ Due to its function and construction, the gas bottle compartment is a space which is open to the exterior. Never cover or block up the standard forced ventilations. Otherwise gas that is emitted can not be diverted to the outside.
▶ Do not use the gas bottle compartment as storage space as it is not moisture-proof.
- Secure the gas bottle compartment against unauthorised access. To do this, lock the compartment.
The regulator tap on the gas bottle must be accessible.
▶ Only connect gas-operated devices (e.g. gas grill) which have been designed for a gas pressure of 30 mbar.
The exhaust gas pipe must be fitted tightly to the heating system and to the vent and must be sealed. The exhaust gas pipe must not show any evidence of damage.
Exhaust fumes must be able to escape into the atmosphere unhindered and fresh air must be able to enter unhindered. For this reason, keep the exhaust pipe and intake openings clean and unobstructed (e.g. free from snow and ice). For this reason, no snow walls or aprons may lie against the vehicle.

8.2 Gas bottles

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Gas bottles - 1

Gas bottles are only to be transported within the designated gas bottle compartment.
Place the gas bottles in vertical position in the gas bottle compartment.
▶ Fasten the gas bottles so that they are unable to turn or tilt.
▶ If the gas bottles are not connected to the gas tube, always place the protective cap on top.
▶ Close the regulator tap on the gas bottle before the gas pressure regulator or gas tube are removed from the gas bottle.
The gas pressure regulator or the gas tube must only be secured with a suitable gas spanner (Do not overtighten).
▶ Only use special gas pressure regulators with a safety valve designed for vehicle use. Other gas pressure regulators are not permitted and cannot meet the demanding requirements.
▶ Use the gas pressure regulator defroster if the temperature falls below 5^ C.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Gas bottles - 2

▶ Use only 11 kg or 5 kg gas bottles. Camping gas bottles with built-in check valve (blue bottle with max. 2.5 or 3 kg content) are can be used in exceptional cases with a safety valve.
▶ Use the shortest possible tube lengths (150 cm max.) for external gas bottles.
▶ Never block the floor ventilation openings below the gas bottles.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Gas bottles - 3

For gas-operated units the gas pressure must be reduced to 30 mbar.
▷ Connect gas pressure regulator complete with safety valve directly to bottle valve.
The gas pressure regulator reduces the gas pressure in the gas bottle down to the operating pressure of the gas devices.
For filling and connecting the gas bottles in Europe the accessories shops have corresponding Euro filling sets and Euro bottle sets.
▷ Information available at the dealers or service centre.
For information on the gas supply in Europe see chapter 17.

8.3 Gas consumption

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Gas consumption - 1

The data about gas consumption of the individual gas devices is standard average values.

Appliances Gas consumption in grams/hour
Cooker, per cooker Approx. 140 - 165 g/hRefrigerator Approx. 18 g/h

8.4 Changing gas bottles

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Changing gas bottles - 1

When changing gas bottles, do not smoke or create any open fire.
When you have changed the gas bottle, check whether gas escapes at the connection points and unions. Use a leakage search spray to spray the relevant connection point or union. These agents are available at the accessories shop.

1 2 3 DET00298

1 2 3 4 DET00392

Fig. 101 Gas bottle compartment Fig. 102 Gas bottle connection

■ Open external gas bottle compartment (see section 7.2).
■ Fold guard plate (Fig. 101,3) down.
■ Set handle (Fig. 101,2) into a horizontal position.

■ Pull out the slide (Fig. 101,1) as far as possible.
■ Close the regulator tap (Fig. 102,4) on the gas bottle. Pay attention to the direction of the arrow.
■ Unscrew the gas pressure regulator (Fig. 102,2) from the gas bottle at the hexagon nut (Fig. 102,3).
■ Remove the gas pressure regulator and the gas tube (Fig. 102,1) from the gas bottle.
■ Release the fixing belts and remove the gas bottle.
■ Place a filled gas bottle in the gas bottle compartment.
■ Fix gas bottle in place with the fixing belts.
■ Position the gas pressure regulator (Fig. 102,2) and the gas tube (Fig. 102,1) on the gas bottle and screw in tightly to the gas bottle at the hexagonal nut (Fig. 102,3).
■ Push in the slide (Fig. 101,1) as far as possible, and set the handle (Fig. 101,2) in a vertical position.
■ Fold guard plate (Fig. 101,3) up.
■ Close the external flap (see section 7.2).

8.5 Gas isolator taps

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Gas isolator taps - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["1"] --> B["2"]
    B --> C["3"]
    C --> D["4"]

1 Refrigerator
2 Cooker
3 Heater/boiler
4 O v e n

Fig. 103 Symbols for the gas isolator taps

A gas isolator tap (Fig. 103) for every gas device is built into the vehicle.

The gas isolator taps are located under the cooker or in the vicinity of the gas devices (e.g. in the bench seat).

8.6 Hose break guard (crash protection unit)

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Hose break guard (crash protection unit) - 1

When the vehicle is equipped with the crash protection unit the living area heater may be operated during the journey.
Also read the manufacturer's instruction manual.

The crash protection unit protects against unwanted gas discharge. In the event of an accident or a too high angle of the vehicle the gas supply will automatically be interrupted.

Construction of the unit

The crash protection unit consists of a control unit, an electrical valve and the operating unit with a tricoloured LED.

1 2 I 0 DET00653

Fig. 104 Operating unit

Only the electrical functions can be switched at the operating unit (Fig. 104). The regulator taps on the gas bottles must be opened manually.

The indicator lamp on the operating unit shows the condition of the gas system. The system is okay when the indicator lamp (Fig. 104,1) lights up green. When the indicator lamp lights up or flashes red a fault has occurred. The gas supply is interrupted.

Putting into operation:

■ Open regulator taps on the gas bottles.
■ Switch on the system at the operating unit (Fig. 104). For this, set the rocker switch (Fig. 104,2) to "I". The indicator lamp (Fig. 104,1) flashes yellow (system test) and lights up green.

Switching off:

■ Set the rocker switch (Fig. 104,2) to "O". The indicator lamp (Fig. 104,1) goes out.
■ Close regulator taps on the gas bottles.

8.7 External gas connection

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - External gas connection - 1

▶ If the external gas connection is not in use, always close the gas isolator tap.
▶ Only gas appliances with a suitable adapter should be connected to the external gas connection.
▶ Connect only external gas appliances which are designed for an operation pressure of 30 mbar.
Once you have made the connection and opened the gas isolator tap, make sure that no gas is escaping at the connection point. If there is a leak in the external gas connection, gas will escape into the open air. Immediately close the gas isolator tap and the regulator tap on the gas bottle. Have the external gas connection checked by an authorised specialist workshop.
When connecting an external gas appliance, make sure that there is nothing near the external gas connection that could cause a spark.
▶ Do not use the external gas connection to fill gas bottles. Observe the information stickers on the external gas connection.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - External gas connection - 2

natural_image Interior view of an electronic device showing internal components and a lid (no visible text or symbols)

Fig. 105 External gas connection, gas isolator tap closed

The external gas connection (Fig. 105) is located at the rear or to the left or right of the vehicle depending on the model.

■ Connect the external gas device to the connection point (Fig. 105,1).
■ Open the gas isolator tap (Fig. 105,2).

8.8 Duomatic switching facility

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Duomatic switching facility - 1

▶ Do not use the switching facility in closed spaces.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Duomatic switching facility - 2

If the vehicle is equipped with a panel of the DT series and the switching facility is operated via this panel, the operating unit is redundant.
▶ Further information can be obtained in the device manufacturer's instruction manual.

The Duomatic is an automatic switching facility with a remote display for a two-bottle gas system. The Duomatic switching facility automatically switches gas supply from the primary bottle to the reserve bottle as soon as the primary bottle is either empty or no longer ready for operation. The gas appliances may still continue operation. The Duomatic switching facility is suitable for all commercial gas bottles from 3 kg to 33 kg.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Duomatic switching facility - 3

natural_image Two gas cylinders with attached tubing and pressure gauges, no visible text or symbols

Truma Duomatic L Plus 3 4 2 5 1 6 7 A B HYW07365

Fig. 106 Duomatic switching facility Fig. 107 Operating unit

Construction of the unit

The Duomatic switching facility consists of a central regulator (Fig. 106,3) and a switching regulator (Fig. 106,5). The knob (Fig. 106,6) on the switching regulator is used to select which of the gas bottles is to be used as a primary bottle and which is to be used as a reserve bottle.

Both regulators are equipped with a pressure controller and the regulator defroster Eis-Ex. This prevents damage to the gas system during the winter months.

The pressure gauge (Fig. 106,2) on the central regulator indicates the pressure in the gas bottle, not the filling level of the gas bottle. The pressure gauge can be used to test the impermeability of the gas bottle.

Only the electrical functions can be switched at the operating unit (Fig. 107). The regulator taps on the gas bottles (Fig. 106,1 and 4) must be opened manually.

The central regulator provides a constant gas pressure, regardless of which gas bottle is being drawn upon. The two indicator lamps on the operating unit show which gas bottle can be used to provide gas. When both indicator lamps are illuminated, the position of the knob on the switching regulator indicates which gas bottle is currently being drawn upon.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Construction of the unit - 1

When operating with only one gas bottle (e.g. during the summer) connect the central regulator to this bottle. Position the knob on the switching regulator in the red area.

Operating modes The Duomatic switching facility has two operating modes:

● Winter operation "On and heating"
- Summer operation "On"

Putting into operation:

■ Open the regulator taps on the gas bottles (Fig. 106,1 and 4).
■ Use the knob (Fig. 106,6) on the switching regulator (Fig. 106,5) to select the gas bottle which is to be the primary source of gas (primary bottle). Always turn the knob as far as it will go.
When the knob is in the red area, the gas is taken primarily from the gas bottle with the central regulator (Fig. 106,3).
When the knob is in the green area, the gas is taken primarily from the gas bottle with the switching regulator (Fig. 106,5).
■ Switch on the Duomatic switching facility at the operating unit (Fig. 107). To do so, set the rocker switch (Fig. 107,2) to winter operation "On and heating" (Fig. 107,4) or to summer operation "On" (Fig. 107,6). Both gas pressure regulators are now ventilated. The operating indicator (Fig. 107,3) lights up.

Switching off:

■ Set the rocker switch (Fig. 107,2) to "O" (Fig. 107,5). The operating indicator (Fig. 107,3) goes out.
■ Close the regulator taps on the gas bottles (Fig. 106,1 and 4).

Remote display

The indicator lamps on the operating unit (Fig. 107) indicate in the vehicle interior whether the gas bottles are ready for operation.

  • Indicator lamp "A" (Fig. 107,1): Gas bottle on the central regulator
  • Indicator lamp "B" (Fig. 107,7): Gas bottle on the switching regulator

Changing gas bottles

If an indicator lamp goes out during operation, this signifies that the corresponding gas bottle is empty and must be replaced. The reserve bottle continues supplying the gas appliances with gas.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Construction of the unit - 2

▶ When changing gas bottles, do not smoke or create any open fire.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Construction of the unit - 3

Changing gas bottles:

Always mount the regulator in such a way that the protective cap faces upwards.

■ Close the regulator tap on the empty gas bottle.
■ Unscrew the regulator of the gas bottle.
■ Connect the full gas bottle to the regulator.
■ Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle.
■ Set the knob on the switching regulator with a half-turn, so that the newly replaced gas bottle will serve as a reserve bottle.

8.9 DuoControl switching facility

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - DuoControl switching facility - 1

▶ Do not use the switching facility in closed spaces.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - DuoControl switching facility - 2

▷ If the vehicle is equipped with a panel of the DT series and the switching facility is operated via this panel, the operating unit is redundant.
Also read the manufacturer's instruction manual.

The DuoControl is an automatic switching facility with a remote display for a two-bottle gas system. The DuoControl switching facility automatically switches gas supply from the primary bottle to the reserve bottle as soon as the primary bottle is either empty or no longer ready for operation. The gas appliances may still continue operation. The DuoControl switching facility is suitable for all commercial gas bottles from 3 kg to 33 kg.

1 2 3 4 5 6 E.2018 2018 HYW08018

Truma DuoC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 HYW08019

Fig. 108 DuoControl switching facility Fig. 109 Operating unit

Construction of the unit

The DuoControl switching facility consists of a reversing valve (Fig. 108,3) and an operating unit (Fig. 109). The reversing valve is installed between the gas tubes (Fig. 108,2 and 5). The knob (Fig. 108,4) on the reversing valve is used to select which of the gas bottles is to be used as a primary bottle and which is to be used as a reserve bottle.

The reversing valve is equipped with the regulator defroster Eis-Ex. This prevents damage to the gas system during the winter months.

Only the electrical functions can be switched at the operating unit (Fig. 109). The regulator taps on the gas bottles (Fig. 108,1 and 6) must be opened manually.

The reversing valve provides a constant gas pressure, regardless of which gas bottle is being drawn upon. The two indicator lamps on the operating unit indicate the level of the primary bottle. When the green indicator lamp (Fig. 109,6)

illuminates, the primary bottle is full. When the red indicator lamp (Fig. 109,5) illuminates, the primary bottle is empty. In this case, the reserve bottle is used for the gas supply.

Operating modes The DuoControl switching facility has two operating modes:

  • Winter operation "On and heating"
  • Summer operation "On"

Putting into operation:

■ Open the regulator taps on the gas bottles (Fig. 108,1 and 6).
■ Use the knob (Fig. 108,4) on the reversing valve (Fig. 108,3) to select the gas bottle which is to be the primary source of gas (primary bottle). Always turn the knob as far as it will go.
■ Switch on the DuoControl switching facility at the operating unit (Fig. 109). To do so, set the rocker switch (Fig. 109,7) to winter operation "On and heating" (Fig. 109,2) or to summer operation "On" (Fig. 109,4). The reversing valve is now deaerated. The yellow indicator lamp (Fig. 109,1) illuminates if the winter operation has been selected and the regulator defroster is activated.

Switching off:

■ Set the rocker switch (Fig. 109,7) to "O" (Fig. 109,3). The yellow indicator lamp (Fig. 109,1) goes out.
■ Close the regulator taps on the gas bottles (Fig. 108,1 and 6).

Remote display

The indicator lamps on the operating unit (Fig. 109,5 and 6) indicate in the vehicle interior whether the primary bottle is ready for operation.

Changing gas bottles

If the green indicator lamp (Fig. 109,6) stops illuminating during operation and the red indicator lamp (Fig. 109,5) illuminates, the gas bottle selected as primary bottle is empty and needs to be changed. The reserve bottle continues supplying the gas appliances with gas.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Construction of the unit - 1

When changing gas bottles, do not smoke or create any open fire.

Changing gas bottles:

■ Close the regulator tap on the empty gas bottle.
■ Unscrew the gas tube of the gas bottle.
■ Connect the full gas bottle to the gas tube.
■ Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle.
■ Set the knob on the reversing valve with a half-turn, so that the newly replaced gas bottle will serve as a reserve bottle.

Chapter overview

This chapter contains instructions regarding the electrical system of the vehicle.

The instructions address the following topics:

  • safety
    ● explanations of terms relating to the battery
  • 12 V power supply
  • living area battery
  • loading the batteries
  • AC converter
    • auxiliary charging unit
  • transformer/rectifier
    panel
  • 240 V power supply
  • connection to the 240 V power supply
  • fuse rating

The operation of the electrical appliances of the housing body is described in chapter 10.

9.1 General safety instructions

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - General safety instructions - 1

▶ Only allow qualified personnel to work on the electrical system.
All electronic devices (e.g. mobile telephones, radios, televisions or DVD players) which have been retrofitted to the vehicle and are operated during the journey must have certain features: These are the CE certification, the EMC inspection (electromagnetic compatibility) and the "E1" inspection.
Only in this way can the functional reliability of the vehicle be ensured. Otherwise the airbag may be triggered or interference to the on-board electronics may result.

The vehicle is a safe place during a storm (Faraday cage). However, to protect the electrical devices, disconnect the 240 V connection and retract the antennae as a precaution.

9.2 Terms

Off-load voltage

The off-load voltage is the voltage of the battery in idle condition, i. e. no current is consumed and the battery is not being charged.

Closed circuit current

Some electrical appliances, such as the clock and the indicator lamps, require continuous electric current, for this reason they are referred to as inactive appliances. This closed circuit current flows even if the 12 V power supply has been switched off.

Total discharge

Total discharge of the battery is imminent, if a battery is completely discharged by an active appliance and by closed circuit current.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Total discharge - 1

▷ Total discharge damages the battery.

Capacity Capacity refers to the amount of electricity which can be stored in a battery.

The capacity of a battery is given in ampere hours (Ah). If a battery possesses a capacity of 80 Ah, then the battery can dispense a current of 1 A for 80 hours or a current of 2 A for 40 hours.

External influences such as temperature may alter the storage capacity of the battery.

9.3 12 V power supply

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - 12 V power supply - 1

To disconnect all electrical 12 V appliances from the power supply, disconnect the living area battery from the 12 V power supply via the panel.

When the vehicle is not connected to the 240 V power supply or the 240 V power supply is switched off, the living area battery supplies the living area with 12 V DC. The living area battery has a limited power supply only. For this reason, electrical appliances such as the radio and the lights should not be operated for a long time without using the 240 V power supply.

When the vehicle engine is running, the vehicle alternator recharges the living area battery and the starter battery.

The 12 V power supply can be cut off with the 12 V main switch on the panel. Depending on the model, the heater, basic light/entrance step and reserve 4 or only the electrical entrance step remain on standby. The refrigerator is then only operated with 12 V if the vehicle engine is running. This helps to prevent the living area battery from being run down too quickly.

9.3.1 Living area battery

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Living area battery - 1

Prior to commencing a journey ensure the living area battery is fully charged. For this reason charge the living area battery for at least 20 hours before commencing the journey.

During the trip, use every opportunity to charge the living area battery.

▶ Charge the living area battery for at least 20 hours after the journey.

▶ Charge the battery for at least 20 hours before laying up.

Use the charger module provided on the transformer/rectifier to charge the living area battery. When charging externally, use a regulated charger that is suitable for the battery type and the capacity of the living area battery.

For long periods of inactivity (4 weeks or more), either disconnect the living area battery from the 12 V power supply via the panel or recharge it regularly.

When the living area battery is changed, only use batteries of the same type.

When changing the living area battery, use only batteries which meet the minimum capacity of the charger. Observe the separate instruction manual for the charger. Lower-capacity batteries will generate a great deal of heat when they are charged. Danger of explosion!

Before disconnecting or connecting the terminals of the battery, switch off the vehicle engine as well as the 240 V and 12 V power supplies and all appliances. Danger of short circuit!

▷ If the starter battery or living area battery are disconnected, do not apply the ignition. Danger of short circuit!

Appliances with a maximum of 10 A can be connected to the sockets of the 12 V power supply system.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Living area battery - 2

The battery is maintenance-free. Maintenance-free means:

It is not necessary to check the acid level.

It is not necessary to lubricate the battery poles.

It is not necessary to refill the distilled water.

Even a maintenance-free battery must be charged regularly.

Position

The living area battery is installed in the double floor and can be accessed via an external flap on the right of the vehicle.

Discharging

The living area battery is discharged by the closed circuit current which some electrical appliances continuously require.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Discharging - 1

▷ Total discharge damages the battery.
▷ Recharge battery in good time.

The self-discharge rate of the battery is dependant on temperature. At 20 to 25 °C the self-discharge rate is approx. 3 % of the capacity per month. The self-discharge rate will increase with rising temperatures: At 35 °C the self-discharge rate is approx. 20 % of the capacity per month.

During periods of low external temperatures, the battery will lose part of its capacity.

An older battery no longer has the complete capacity available.

The higher the number of active electrical appliances, the faster the energy of the living area battery is consumed.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Discharging - 2

Appliances such as the safety/drainage valve, charger, solar charge regulator and panel consume approx. 20 mA to 65 mA of electricity from the battery capacity, even when the 12 V main switch is turned off. Therefore disconnect the living area battery from the 12 V power supply via the panel, if the vehicle will not be used for a long period of time.

9.4 Charging the living area battery and starter battery

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Charging the living area battery and starter battery - 1

The acid in the battery is poisonous and corrosive. Any contact with the skin or the eyes is to be avoided.
In the case of charging with an external charger there is danger of explosion. Only charge the battery in a well ventilated area and away from naked flames or possible sources of sparks.
▶ Always remove the living area battery or the starter battery from the vehicle when charging them using an external charger.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Charging the living area battery and starter battery - 2

Do not connect the battery cables to the wrong poles.
If the starter battery or living area battery are disconnected, do not apply the ignition. Danger of short circuit!
Before disconnecting or connecting the terminals of the battery, switch off the vehicle engine as well as the 240 V and 12 V power supplies and all appliances. Danger of short circuit!
Before charging the battery, check whether the external charger is approved for the battery type.
Observe the instruction manuals for the base vehicle and the charger.
▷ Irreparable damage to the living area battery will result if it is overcharged.

The starter battery can only be fully charged with an external charger. If a 240 V power supply is used, the transformer/rectifier charges the starter battery with a float charge only. Even in mobile operation, the vehicle engine alternator is not capable of completely charging the starter battery.

9.4.1 Charging using a 240 V power supply

If the vehicle is connected to the 240 V power supply, the living area battery and the starter battery are automatically charged by the charger module on the transformer/rectifier. The starter battery is only charged with a float charge. The charging current is adapted to suit the charging condition of the battery. This ensures that it is not possible to overload the battery.

To make use of the maximum output from the charger module on the transformer/rectifier, switch off all electrical appliances during charging.

9.4.2 Charging using the vehicle engine

When the vehicle engine is running, the vehicle alternator recharges the living area battery and the starter battery. When the vehicle engine is switched off, the batteries are automatically disconnected from one another by a relay in the transformer/rectifier. This prevents the starter battery from being run down by electrical appliances in the living area. The starting capability of the vehicle is thus preserved. The charging condition of the living area battery or the starter battery can be read on the panel.

9.4.3 Charging with an external charger

When charging the living area battery and the starter battery with an external charger, proceed as follows:

■ Turn off the vehicle engine.
■ Switch off 12 V main switch on the panel. The indicator lamp will go off.
■ Disconnect the living area battery from the 12 V power supply.
■ Disconnect the mains plug from the transformer/rectifier.
■ Switch off all gas appliances, all gas isolator taps and close the regulator tap on the gas bottle.
■ There is a danger of short circuit when disconnecting the battery poles. For this reason, first disconnect the negative terminal on the living area battery or the starter battery and then the positive.
■ Remove the living area battery or the starter battery from the vehicle.
■ Check that the external charger is turned off.
■ Connect the external charger to the living area battery or the starter battery. Pay attention to the polarity: First connect the positive terminal "+" to the positive pole of the battery, then connect the negative terminal "-" to the negative pole of the battery.
■ Switch on the external charger.
■ See the instructions for use of the connected charger for information concerning charge period required for the battery.
■ See the specifications on the battery for information concerning its strength.
■ Disconnect the external charger in reverse order.

9.5 AC converter

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - AC converter - 1

Do not cover the ventilation slots. Danger of overheating!

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - AC converter - 2

Also read the manufacturer's instruction manual.

Some models have a converter installed in the vehicle.

The AC converter supplies the 240 V sockets with voltage. When the vehicle is not connected to the 240 V supply, the connected battery supplies the voltage.

The battery has a limited power supply only. For this reason, the electrical appliances should not be operated for a long time without using the 240 V power supply.

1 2 3 4 UNIT: 100000 UNIT: 100000 UNIT: 100000 UNIT: 100000 DE T00600

Fig. 110 Displays and operating controls

1 WAECO Push On / Off Remote Control WAECO SafePower Accessory DE T00601

Fig. 111 External switch

The converter can be switched to two operating modes with the main switch (Fig. 110,1):

- I "On" = unit permanently switched on.

- II "Remo." = unit can be switched on and off at the external switch (Fig. 111,1).

The LEDs show the operating mode "Power Status" (Fig. 110,2), the load range "Load Level" (Fig. 110,3) and the voltage range "Input Level" (Fig. 110,4).

9.6 Auxiliary charging unit

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Auxiliary charging unit - 1

Do not cover the ventilation slots. Danger of overheating!

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Auxiliary charging unit - 2

1 Mains switch (on rear side of unit)

2 Battery selector switch (lead acid/dry-fill option)

3 Fuse

Fig. 112 Auxiliary charging unit

The auxiliary charging unit (Fig. 112) supports the transformer/rectifier's charging performance. Therefore, do not switch off the auxiliary charging unit.

Position The auxiliary charging unit is fitted next to the transformer/rectifier.

9.7 Transformer/rectifier (EBL 220)

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Transformer/rectifier (EBL 220) - 1

Do not cover the ventilation slots. Danger of overheating!

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Transformer/rectifier (EBL 220) - 2

▷ Depending on the model, not all slots for the fuses are occupied.

▶ Further information can be obtained in the device manufacturer's instruction manual.

1 2 3 4 5 EBL 2 -0 - 2 SCH-9 JDT Zus-Lader 2 Zus-Lader 2 Zus-Lader 1 BL.6 HLB 25A 25A int. Labemontal Reserve 2 Pumpel Kryp 3 Kryp 4 Kryp 5 15A 15A 15A 15A 15A 10A 10A 15A 15A 15A 15A 15A 15A 15A 15A 15A 15A 15A 15A 15A 15A 15A 15A 15A 15A 15A 15A 15A 15A 15A 15A 15A 100V ~ 30Hz 1.8A 746 B 2.15AT - EC3 Bln-Gel Bln-Score BL.10 BL.12 BL.13 Vorsucht / Rup word den Betrie Nicht berüher BL.13 BL.6 BL.7 BL.8 BL.9 BL.10 BL.10 BL.10 BL.10 BL.10 BL.10 BL.10 BL.10 BL.10 BL.10 BL.10 BL.10 BL.10 BL.10 BL.10 BL.10 BL.10 BL.10 BL.10 BL.10 BL.12 BL.12 BL.12 BL.12 BL.12 BL.12 BL.12 BL.12 BL.12 BL.12 BL.12 BL.12 BL.12 BL.12 BL.12 BL.12 BL.12 BL.12 BL.12 BL.12 BL.10 BL.10 BL.10 BL.10 BL.10 BL.10 BL.10 BL.10 BL.10 BL.10 BL.10 BL.10 BL.10 BL.10 BL.10 BL.10 BL.10 BL.10

Fig. 113 Transformer/rectifier (EBL 220)

1 Connections BL 2 - auxiliary charging unit 1

2 Connections BL 1 - auxiliary charging unit 2

3 F I a t f u s e s

4 Connections BL 9 - solar charge regulator

5 Mains connection 240 V

6 Connections BL 10 - panel

7 Battery selector switch, lead acid/dryfill option

8 Connections BL 13 - panel

9 Connections BL 12 - sensor for living area battery D+

10 Connections BL 11 - panel

11 Connections BL 8 - entrance step, TV, antenna

12 Connections BL 6 - heater, water pump, spare

13 Connections BL 7 - awning, tank heater, awning light

14 Selector switch for the number of auxiliary charging units

15 Connections BL 5 - solar charge regulator

16 Connections BL 4 - refrigerator from starter battery

17 Connections BL 3 - refrigerator

Functions The transformer/rectifier has the following functions:

  • The transformer/rectifier charges the living area battery. The transformer/rectifier charges the starter battery with a float charge only.
  • The transformer/rectifier monitors the voltage in the living area battery.
  • The transformer/rectifier distributes the current to the 12 V circuits and secures them. Devices with a maximum of 10 A can be connected to the sockets.
  • The transformer/rectifier contains connections for a solar charge regulator, an auxiliary charging unit as well as other control and monitoring functions.
  • When the engine is turned off, the transformer/rectifier separates the starter battery electrically from the living area battery. This prevents the 12 V living area appliances from discharging the starter battery.

The transformer/rectifier only works in conjunction with a panel.

When the transformer/rectifier is subject to a heavy load, the fitted charger module reduces the charging current. This protects the charger from overheating. The transformer/rectifier is subject to a heavy load when e.g. an empty living area battery is being charged, additional electrical appliances are turned on and the ambient temperatures are high.

Position

The transformer/rectifier (Fig. 113) is installed in the double floor. It can be accessed via floor flap in the entrance area.

9.7.1 Battery separation

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Battery separation - 1

The safety/drainage valve will open after the activation of the battery separation. The water flows out of the boiler. When the battery separation is deactivated again, close the safety/drainage valve of the boiler by hand.
Also switch off a refrigerator with automatic power selection system. The refrigerator will otherwise switch to gas operation.
After deactivation of the battery separation, it may be necessary to reset the date and time. The remaining settings will be saved at the activation of the battery separation and will be maintained.

The battery separation disconnects all the living area 12 V appliances, even the safety/drainage valve. This prevents the living area battery from slowly discharging if the vehicle is not used for a longer period of time (e.g. temporary lay-up).

The batteries can still be charged by the transformer/rectifier when the battery separation is activated.

Activating/deactivating See section 9.8.2.

9.7.2 Battery selector switch

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Battery selector switch - 1

If the battery selector switch is set incorrectly, there is the danger of the formation of detonating (oxy-hydrogen gas). Danger of explosion!

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Battery selector switch - 2

▷ Incorrect setting of the battery selector switch damages the living area battery.
The factory settings of the battery selector switch must not be changed.

The battery selector switch is used to set the charger module in the transformer/rectifier to the type of living area battery installed in the vehicle ("lead acid" or "dryfill" battery).

9.7.3 Battery monitor

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Battery monitor - 1

▷ You must fully recharge a discharged living area battery as soon as possible.

The battery monitor in the transformer/rectifier monitors the voltage in the living area battery.

If the battery voltage falls below 10.5 V, the battery monitor in the transformer/rectifier switches off all of the 12 V appliances, excluding the safety/drainage valve.

A refrigerator with automatic power selection system switches to gas operation.

Measures:

■ Switch off all electrical appliances that are not absolutely essential at the corresponding switch.

If necessary, use the 12 V main switch to switch the 12 V power supply back on for a short while. This is only possible, however, when the battery voltage is above 11 V. If the voltage is below this level, the 12 V power supply cannot be switched on again until the living area battery has been recharged.

9.7.4 Charging the battery

When the vehicle engine is running, the vehicle alternator recharges the living area battery and the starter battery. When the vehicle engine is switched off, the batteries are automatically disconnected from one another by a relay in the transformer/rectifier. This prevents the starter battery from being run down by electrical appliances in the living area. The starting capability of the vehicle is thus preserved. The charging condition of the living area battery or the starter battery can be read on the panel.

If the vehicle is connected to the 240 V power supply, the living area battery and the starter battery are automatically charged by the charger module on the transformer/rectifier. The starter battery is only charged with a float charge. The charging current is adapted to suit the charging condition of the battery. This ensures that it is not possible to overload the battery.

To make use of the maximum output from the charger module on the transformer/rectifier, switch off all electrical appliances during charging.

9.8 Panel MP 20-T

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Panel MP 20-T - 1

The luminance of the LEDs and the symbols adapts automatically to the ambient light.
The displays can only be called up if the 12 V power supply is switched on.
As soon as a button is pressed, the gauge is automatically illuminated. The display goes out 20 seconds after the last key has been pressed.
▶ Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 13.5 +10 Dethleffs 12 V 12.0 V A 11.0 -30 100% 100% Dethleffs Res. 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 12 Quen DET00554

Fig. 114 Panel MP 20-T

1 230 V indicator lamp
2 Volt symbol
3 Ampere symbol
4 Interior temperature button
5 Digital display
6 External temperature button
7 Water tank symbol
8 Waste water tank symbol
9 Clock gauge
10 Lock
11 Reserve button
12 Tanks gauge
13 Tanks button
14 Living area battery button
15 Starter battery button
16 Symbol for starter battery and living area battery
17 Batteries gauge
18 Button for 12 V power supply (12 V main switch)

9.8.1 240 V indicator lamp

The 240 V indicator lamp (Fig. 114,1) illuminates whenever line voltage is available at the transformer/rectifier input.

9.8.2 12 V main switch

The 12 V main switch (Fig. 114,18) switches the panel and the 12 V power supply of the living area on and off.

Exception: Heater, safety/drainage valve, basic light (lighting in the entrance area) and entrance step remain operational.

Switching on:

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - 12 V main switch - 1

■ Briefly press the "12 V" button (Fig. 114,18). The 12 V living area power supply is switched on. The "12 V" indicator lights up.
If, after switching on, the "11.0" LED of the volt indicator and the "V" volt symbol (Fig. 114,2) in the batteries gauge (Fig. 114,17) flash, the voltage of the living area battery is too low. Charge battery.
If, after switching on, the "12 V" indicator, the symbol for the living area battery (Fig. 114,16) and the "V" volt symbol (Fig. 114,2) flash three times, battery separation is activated. Deactivate battery separation.

Switching off:

■ Briefly press the "12 V" button (Fig. 114,18). The 12 V living area power supply is switched off. The "12 V" indicator goes out.

Activating battery disconnection (transformer/rectifier without battery cut-off switch):

Deactivating battery disconnection (transformer/rectifier without battery cut-off switch):

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - 12 V main switch - 2

■ Switch off 12 V power supply.

■ Press button for living area battery (Fig. 114,14) and hold it down for approx. 10 seconds. The "V" volt (Fig. 114,2) and "A" ampere (Fig. 114,3) symbols flash three times. The living area battery is disconnected from the 12 V power supply.

■ Press the "12 V" button (Fig. 114,18) and hold it down for approx. 5 seconds. The "V" volt symbol (Fig. 114,2) flashes three times. The living area battery is connected to the 12 V power supply. The indicator lights up after approx. 2 seconds.

When leaving the vehicle, switch off the 12 V main switch. This prevents any unnecessary discharge of the living area battery.

Appliances such as the safety/drainage valve, charger, solar charge regulator and panel consume approx. 20 mA to 65 mA of electricity from the battery capacity, even when the 12 V main switch is turned off. Therefore disconnect the living area battery from the 12 V power supply, if the vehicle will not be used for a long period of time.

9.8.3 Batteries gauge

The voltage and charging/discharging of the living area battery or the starter battery voltage can be indicated using the batteries gauge.

Displays:

■ Press button for living area battery "☐" (Fig. 114,14). The "V" volt symbol (Fig. 114,2) lights up. Depending on whether the battery is being charged or discharged, the "A" ampere symbol lights up white or red respectively. The battery voltage and current of the living area battery are displayed using the LEDs in the gauge.

■ Press button for starter battery "☐" (Fig. 114,15). The "V" volt symbol (Fig. 114,2) lights up. The battery voltage of the starter battery is displayed using the LEDs in the gauge.

The tables below will help you interpret the statuses displayed on the panel.

Volt indicator (blue)

1 LED2 LEDs3 LEDs4 LEDs5 LEDs6 LEDs7 LEDs8 LEDs
< 11.0 V11.5 V12.0 V12.2 V12.5 V12.7 V13.0 V>13.5 V

Danger of total discharge (battery alarm)

Battery voltage (values during operation)Mobile operation (vehicle moving, no 240 V connection)Battery operation (vehicle stationary, no 240 V connection)Power operation (vehicle stationary, 240 V connection)
11 V or less 1)12 V power supply overloadIf appliances are switched off: Battery flatIf appliances are switched on: Battery overload12 V power supply overload
The battery is not charged by the alternator, the alternator's regulator is defectiveThe battery is not charged by the transformer/rectifier, the transformer/rectifier is defective
11.5 V to 13 V 12 Vpower supply overload 2)Normal range 12 Vpower supply overload 2)
The battery is not charged by the alternator, the alternator's regulator is defectiveThe battery is not charged by the transformer/rectifier, the transformer/rectifier is defective
Over 13.5 V Batteryis being charged (main charge)Occurs only briefly after chargingBattery is being charged (main charge)

1) The battery guard switches all the appliances off (at 10.5 V).
2) If the voltage does not exceed this range for several hours.

Values for off-load voltage Charging condition of the battery
Less than 11 V Totally discharged
12.0 V 0 % (discharged)
12.2 V 25 %
12.3 V 50 %
12.5 V 75 %
More than 12.8 V Full

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Volt indicator (blue) - 1

▷ Total discharge causes irreparable damage to the battery.

Ampere indicator (blue)

1 LED2 LEDs3 LEDs4 LEDs5 LEDs6 LEDs7 LEDs8 LEDs
Discharging with: Charging with:
>30 A>10 A>3 A>1 AApprox. 0 A>1 A>3 A>10 A
Current displayed System status "A" ampere symbol
-30 A to -10 A Battery is being heavily dischargedLights up red
-10 A to -1 A Battery is being dischargedLights up white
0 A Battery current is low or 0 ALights up white
+1 A to +10 A Battery being charged Lights up white

9.8.4 Tank gauge

The water and waste water quantities can be indicated using the tank gauge.

Displays:

■ Press tanks button "☐" (Fig. 114,13). The water tank "☐" (Fig. 114,7) and waste water tank "(Fig. 114,8) symbols light up. The fill level of the water tank (left-hand scale) and the waste water tank (right-hand scale) are indicated using the LEDs in the gauge.

The table below will help you interpret the levels displayed on the panel.

Level indicator (blue)

1 LED2 LEDs3 LEDs4 LEDs5 LEDs6 LEDs7 LEDs8 LEDs
25 %50 %75 %100 %

9.8.5 Alarms

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Alarms - 1

Battery alarm

The alarm functions are only active when the corresponding display is called up. Perform checks regularly. It is best to perform checks in the morning, before the 12 V appliances are switched on.

The "V" volt symbol (Fig. 114,2) and the "11.0" LED flash as soon as the battery voltage falls below 11 V (measured during operation) and there is the threat of a total discharge.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Battery alarm - 1

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Battery alarm - 2

Measures:

▷ Total discharge damages the battery.

If the battery voltage falls below 10.5 V, the battery monitor in the transformer/rectifier switches off all of the 12 V appliances, excluding the safety/drainage valve.

■ When the battery alarm comes on, switch off the appliances and charge the battery, either by mobile operation or by connection to a 240 V power supply.

Tank alarm

The water tank symbol " (Fig. 114,7) or waste water tank symbol " (Fig. 114,8) flashes when the water tank is empty or the waste water tank is full.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Tank alarm - 1

If, when the fill levels are called up, the LEDs in the scale flash in addition to the tank symbol, a sensor error has occurred. Clean tank sensors.

Measures: ■ Fill water tank or empty waste water tank.

9.8.6 Temperature display

The internal and external temperatures can be indicated using the digital display (Fig. 114,5).

Displays:

■ Press internal temperature button "☐" (Fig. 114,4). The internal temperature is displayed.

■ Press external temperature button "☐" (Fig. 114,6). The external temperature is displayed.

9.8.7 Clock gauge

The clock gauge (Fig. 114,9) displays the time. The clock has its own battery and is not connected to the 12 V power supply.

Detach the clock if the battery needs to be replaced or the clock needs to be set.

Detaching clock:

■ Turn lock (Fig. 114,10) one quarter turn. The lock is released.

■ Detach clock by pulling forwards.

Fitting clock:

■ Install clock.

■ Lightly press lock (Fig. 114,10) and turn a quarter turn.

■ Check lock by lightly pulling on the clock.

9.8.8 Switch for tank heater

The tank heater can be turned on and off using the "Res" button (Fig. 114,11).

Switching on:

■ Press "Res" reserve button (Fig. 114,11). The "Res" symbol lights up.

Switching off:

■ Press "Res" reserve button (Fig. 114,11). The "Res" symbol goes out.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Switching off: - 1

The switch status is saved when the 12 V power supply is switched off. This means: If the tank heater was on when the 12 V power supply was switched off, the heater is also switched on when the 12 V power supply is switched back on.

9.9 240 V power supply

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - 240 V power supply - 1

▶ Only allow qualified personnel to work on the electrical system.

The 240 V power supply provides electricity for:

  • sockets with earth contact for appliances with maximum 16 A
  • refrigerator
  • transformer/rectifier
  • air conditioning unit

The electrical appliances connected to the 12 V power supply of the living area are supplied with voltage by the living area battery.

Connect the vehicle to an external 240 V power supply system as often as possible. The charger module in the transformer/rectifier automatically charges the living area battery. In addition to this, the starter battery is charged with a float charge.

The air conditioning unit and other optional devices are fuse-protected by their own two-pole automatic circuit breaker (16 A).

9.9.1 240 V connection

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - 240 V connection - 1

The external 240 V power supply must be protected by fuse with a fault current protection switch (FI-switches, 30 mA).

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - 240 V connection - 2

For the connection points on camp sites (camping distributors) highly sensitive fault current protection switches (FI-switches, 30 mA) are obligatory.

The vehicle can be connected to an external 240 V power supply. The cable may have a length of maximum 25 m.

9.9.2 Power cable for external 240 V connection

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Power cable for external 240 V connection - 1

▶ Completely unwind the cable on cable drums to prevent overheating.

Power cable

  • Three-core (3 x 2.5 mm ^2 ) flexible rubber sheathed cable
    • Maximum 25 m in length
  • 1 plug with earth contact
    ● 1 socket with earth contact (plug-in devices according to EN 60309)

Connection possibilities

For your power cable, we recommend using a CEE connection cable with a CEE plug and coupling. If this type of connection is not feasible, we recommend the following combination with a safety plug:

Diagram showing cable connections with numbered components, likely illustrating electrical wiring or wiring harnessing.

Fig. 115 Connection possibilities 240 V connection

1 2 3 HYW07711

Fig. 116 Connecting an angled connector with socket

  • Adapter cable: CEE 17 socket with earth contact (Fig. 115,1) – plug with earth contact (Fig. 115,2)
  • Cable reel: Socket with earth contact (Fig. 115,3) – plug with earth contact (Fig. 115,4)

- Adapter cable: CEE 17 socket with earth contact (Fig. 115,5) – plug with earth contact (Fig. 115,6)

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Connection possibilities - 3

When using a CEE 17 angled connector with rear socket (Fig. 116,1) only use a rubberised and sealed IP 44 socket with earth contact (Fig. 116,2). Do not use sockets without earth contact (Fig. 116,3). Danger of electrocution!

Depending on the design, the flap for the 240 V connection is designated with the symbol "#.

Connecting the power cable:

■ Open external flap.
■ Depending on the design, tilt the cover upwards.
■ Insert connector.

▷ Depending on the design, disconnect the connector before removing it.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Connection possibilities - 4

9.10 Fuses

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Fuses - 1

▶ Only replace defective fuses when the cause of the defect is known and has been remedied.
▶ Replace defective fuses only after the power supply has been turned off.
▶ Never bridge or repair fuses.

9.10.1 12 V fuses

The appliances connected to the 12 V power supply in the living area are fused individually. The fuses are accessible at different positions in the vehicle.

1 2 HYW07712

Fig. 117 12 V fuse

1 Unbroken fuse element
2 Broken fuse element

An intact 12 V fuse can be detected by the unbroken fuse element (Fig. 117,1). If the fuse element is broken (Fig. 117,2), change the fuse.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - 12 V fuses - 2

Before changing the fuses, check the rating and colour of the fuses in question. When changing fuses, use only fuses with the same ratings as the fuses fitted at the factory.

Fuses on the starter battery

The fuses are fitted in the engine compartment above the starter battery.

Depending on the model, the type and rating of the fuses may differ to those shown here.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Fuses on the starter battery - 1

natural_image Close-up of three transparent electrical contactors labeled 1, 2, and 3, mounted on a surface (no visible text or symbols beyond labels)

Fig. 118 Fuses on the starter battery

1 Jumbo flat fuse 60 A/blue (for the transformer/rectifier)
2 Jumbo flat fuse 20 A/yellow (for refrigerator and charging line)
3 Flat fuse 2 A/grey (for alternator D+)

Fuses on the living area battery

The fuses are fitted next to the living area battery.

Depending on the model, the type and rating of the fuses may differ to those shown here.

1 2 3 DET00403

Fig. 119 Fuses on the living area battery

1 Jumbo flat fuse 20 A/yellow (for the optional device)
2 Jumbo flat fuse 60 A/blue (for the transformer/rectifier)
3 Flat fuse 2 A/grey (for battery charger sensor)

Fuse for the Thetford toilet (swivel toilet)

The fuse is located in the locker wall of the Thetford cassette.

HYW07975 1

Fig. 120 Fuse for the Thetford toilet

1 Flat fuse 3 A/purple

1 HYW07916

Fig. 121 Fuse for the Thetford toilet (alternative)

Changing:

■ Open the flap for the Thetford cassette on the outside of the vehicle.
■ Pull out the Thetford cassette completely.
■ Replace fuse (Fig. 120,1 or Fig. 121,1).

9.10.2 240 V fuse

Depending on the model and optional devices, the number of automatic circuit breakers may differ from the example shown here.

1 2 3 4 DET00404

Fig. 122 240 V automatic circuit breakers

1 Automatic circuit breaker for the air conditioning unit
2 Automatic circuit breaker for the optional device
3 Fault current protection switch
4 Automatic circuit breaker 240 V connection

The 240 V connection is protected by a two-pole automatic circuit breaker (Fig. 122,4) (10 A).

Position Depending on the model, the automatic circuit breakers are installed in the wardrobe or rear garage.

Chapter overview

This chapter contains instructions regarding the appliances of the vehicle.

The instructions refer exclusively to the operation of the appliances.

Further information about the appliances can be found in the instruction manuals for the appliances, included separately with the vehicle.

The instructions address the following topics:

  • heater
  • boiler
  • gas cooker
  • gas oven
  • microwave oven
  • extractor hood
  • refrigerator
    • air conditioning unit
  • dishwasher
  • vacuum cleaner

10.1 General

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - General - 1

The heat exchanger of the Alde hot-water heater has to be replaced after 10 years. Only the manufacturer of the heater or an authorised specialist workshop is allowed to replace the heat exchanger. The operator of the heater must see to it that the parts are replaced.
For safety reasons, spare parts for pieces of heating appliances must correspond with manufacturer's instructions and be permitted by the manufacturer as a spare part. These spare parts may only be fitted by the manufacturer or an authorised specialist workshop.
▶ Further information can be obtained in the instruction manual for the respective appliance.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - General - 2

The heater, boiler, cooker, refrigerator and air conditioning unit are fitted depending on the model of the vehicle.

In this instruction manual a description is given only for the operation of the appliances and their particular features.

To operate gas appliances, first open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap corresponding to the appliance.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - General - 3

flowchart
graph LR
    A["1"] --> B["2"]
    B --> C["3"]
    C --> D["4"]

1 Refrigerator
2 C o o k e r
3 Heater/boiler
4 O v e n

Fig. 123 Symbols for the gas isolator taps

10.2 Alde hot-water heater

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Alde hot-water heater - 1

▶ Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.
▶ Never run the heater in gas operation when refuelling, on ferries or in the garage. Danger of explosion!
▶ Never operate the heater in gas operation in closed spaces (e.g. garages). Danger of poisoning and suffocation!

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Alde hot-water heater - 2

▷ Never run hot-water heater without heating fluid. Observe notes in chapter 13.
▷ Never drill holes in the floor. This might damage the hot-water pipes.
Do not use the space above and behind the heater as a storage compartment.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Alde hot-water heater - 3

The circulating pump must always be turned on when the hot-water heater is in operation.
We recommend to bleed the heating system after the initial heater operation and to check the glycol content. Observe notes in chapter 13.
▷ When the heater is turned on, it starts with the last settings used.
For further information, see the separate manufacturer's instruction manual and observe the maintenance instructions found in chapter 13.
For further information about the use of the boiler see section "Boiler".

Initial start-up

When lighting the heater for the first time a small amount of smoke and odour will occur. Immediately set the operating switch of the heater to its highest position. Open doors and windows and ventilate well. Smoke and odour will disappear by themselves after a while.

Operating unit The operating unit is divided into two sections:

  • Display (touch screen)
  • Control buttons

1 Made 3 MENU 2 DET00602

1 Display (touch screen)
2 "Menu" button
3 On/Off button

Fig. 124 Operating unit for hot-water heater
Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Initial start-up - 2

When no button is pressed, the operating unit automatically switches to home position after two minutes.
Changes to the settings are saved automatically after 10 seconds.

Control buttons The control buttons have the following functions:

Pos. in Fig. 124Button Function
2 MENUOpen adjustment menu
3

Display The display (Fig. 124,1) is designed as a touch screen. Touching the symbols calls up the relevant function.

Start screen

The Start screen appears on the display after the heater is switched on. The Start screen contains the following information:

Symbol Signification
This symbol appears when the circulating pump is activated
This symbol appears when a switching facility for gas cylinders is activated
This symbol appears when a voltage of 240 V is present at the heater
The internal temperature is displayed next to this symbol
The external temperature is displayed next to this symbol if an external sensor is fitted

Adjustment menu

The "MENU" button calls up the adjustment menu. The meanings of the individual symbols are described in the following table.

The values can be increased or reduced via the "+" or "-" symbols.

Symbol Signification
Set the desired temperature of +5 °C to +30 °C
Set the water temperature in the boiler
Set the heat output in electrical operation
Activate the function "Heating in gas operation"
Call up the enabling menu for the tool menus

Tool menus

The various heater functions can be called up and adjusted via the tool menus. The arrow symbols are used to change between the menus. The meanings of the individual symbols are described in the manufacturer's instruction manual.

Selecting the operating mode

The hot-water heater can be operated with the following energy sources:

Gas operation
● 240 V electrical operation
● Gas and 240 V electrical operation

The operating mode is selected from the operating unit.

Selecting gas operation:

■ Press the "On" button next to the "△" symbol. The gas operation is activated.
■ Press the "+" button next to the "⚡" symbol until the desired heat output is reached.

Selecting 240 V electrical operation:

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Selecting the operating mode - 1

▷ Select the output level during 240 V electrical operation in such a way that it corresponds to the 240 V connection protection:
Level 1 (1050 W) at 6 A
Level 2 (2100 W) at 10 A
Level 3 (3150 W) at 16 A

Selecting gas and 240 V electrical operation:

■ Select gas operation and 240 V electrical operation on the operating unit.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Selecting the operating mode - 2

If gas and 240 V electrical operation is selected and if the vehicle is connected to the 240 V power supply, then the hot-water heater at first only operates in 240 V electric operation. Only if the heat output is insufficient does the gas operation also automatically switch on.
The gas operation is only possible when the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap are opened.
240 V electrical operation is only possible when the vehicle is connected to the 240 V power supply.

When the heater is turned on, it starts with the last set operating mode.

Switching on the heater:

■ Press "button. The Start screen appears in the display. The heater starts automatically.

Switching the heater off:

■ Press "button. The heater is turned off.

10.2.1 Alde heat exchanger

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Alde heat exchanger - 1

The heat exchanger only works when the vehicle engine is running.
▷ If the heat exchanger is not being used (as in the summer), the heat exchanger on the stopcock should be shut off.

The heat exchanger can be used to heat the living area of the vehicle during travel without operating the hot-water heater in the living area.

The heat exchanger is connected to the vehicle engine's cooling circuit and thus has the same function as the vehicle heater.

Heat output is set with the living area's heating regulator.

The heat exchanger stopcock is located directly on the exchanger.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Alde heat exchanger - 2

natural_image Exterior view of a Alde industrial heat exchanger unit (no signage or text in focus)

Fig. 125 Alde heat exchanger

Turning on:

■ Set stopcock handle (Fig. 125,1) parallel to the pipe.

Shutting off:

■ Set drain cock handle (Fig. 125,1) at a right angle to the pipe.

10.2.2 Alde auxiliary circulating pump

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Alde auxiliary circulating pump - 1

The auxiliary circulating pump works only if the heat exchanger has been installed and started, and the hot-water heater is running.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Alde auxiliary circulating pump - 2

natural_image Close-up of a mechanical device with a labeled component (1) and cable, no visible text or symbols on the main body.

1 2 BUE00691

Fig. 126 Auxiliary circulating pump Fig. 127 Operating switch for auxiliary circulating pump

The auxiliary circulating pump (Fig. 126,1) can be used to heat the vehicle engine when parked.

The auxiliary circulating pump is connected to the vehicle engine's cooling circuit and thus functions as an engine heater.

The auxiliary circulating pump switch (Fig. 127,2) is located behind the front passenger's seat. The yellow indicator lamp (Fig. 127,1) illuminates when the pump is operated.

10.2.3 Setting the rotational speed of the circulating pump

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Setting the rotational speed of the circulating pump - 1

The hot-water heater is equipped with a very powerful pump. Only operate the pump for approx. 5 minutes on full output when the system is emptied or the pipes are bled. Otherwise, this will increase wear; loud operating noises are the result.

1 2 DET00254

Fig. 128 Rotational speed reduction switch

The rotational speed of the circulating pump can be set with the sliding switch (Fig. 128,2). At a lower rotary speed, the operating sounds of the pump are quieter.

The sliding regulator is located in the hot-water heater area.

Setting the output:

■ Push sliding trap (Fig. 128,1) towards the right. The output is reduced.

■ Push sliding trap towards the left. The output is increased.

10.3 Independent vehicle heater

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Independent vehicle heater - 1

▶ Do not operate the independent vehicle heater in closed spaces. Danger of suffocation!
▶ Do not operate the independent vehicle heater at petrol stations. Danger of explosion!

The inside and the engine can be heated with the independent vehicle heater. The heating of the engine can be switched off.

The independent vehicle heater can be turned on and off manually or with a timer. The time for the heating to start can be exactly preselected from 1 minute to 24 hours. It is possible to program three switching on times, of which only one can be activated. The maximum permitted operation time is 60 minutes.

9 7:58 1 8 Weibo 2 7 6 5 4 3 DET00221

Fig. 129 Operating unit for independent vehicle heater

Switching on manually:

■ Press the button (Fig. 129,7). The heating mode is displayed by the symbol (Fig. 129,9). The fan will only be switched on when there is a coolant temperature of 30 °C.

Switching off manually:

■ Press the button (Fig. 129,7). The symbol (Fig. 129,9) goes off.

Switching on the engine heating:

■ Press the lower part of the switch (Fig. 129,4). Engine is preheated. The fan is switched on immediately.

Switching off the engine heating:

■ Press the upper part of the switch (Fig. 129,4). Engine stays cold.

Setting the time:

■ Press the button (Fig. 129,2). The time setting is displayed by the symbol (Fig. 129,8).

■ Set the time with the buttons (Fig. 129,3 and 6).

Programming heating start:

■ Press the button (Fig. 129,5).

■ Set the switching on time within ten seconds, with the buttons (Fig. 129,3 and 6).

Selecting programmed switching on time:

- Keep pressing button (Fig. 129,5) until the selected programme number (Fig. 129,1) appears in the display.

10.4 Alde boiler

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Alde boiler - 1

▶ Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.
▶ Never run the boiler in gas operation when refuelling, on ferries or in the garage. Danger of explosion!
▶ Never operate the boiler in gas operation in closed spaces (e.g. garages). Danger of poisoning and suffocation!
The water in the boiler can be heated up to 65 °C. Risk of scalding!

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Alde boiler - 2

▷ Never use boiler when empty.
▶ If the boiler is not being used, empty it if there is any risk of frost.
Only operate the boiler with the maximum temperature setting if you require a large quantity of warm water. This protects the boiler against the build-up of limescale.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Alde boiler - 3

▷ Dethleffs recommends that water from the boiler is not used as drinking water.

10.4.1 Switching the boiler on/off

The boiler is integrated in the hot-water heater. A separate operation is not possible. For operating the hot-water heater, see section 10.2.

10.4.2 Filling/emptying the boiler

The boiler can be supplied with water from the water tank.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Filling/emptying the boiler - 1

natural_image Interior view of an industrial piping system with hoses and valves (no visible text or symbols)

Fig. 130 Drain cock

Filling the boiler with water:

Emptying the boiler:

■ Close drain cock. Position the rocking lever (Fig. 130,1) horizontally.
■ Switch on 12 V power supply on the panel.
■ Set all the water taps to "Hot" and open them. The water pump is turned on. The warm water pipes are filled with water.
- Keep the taps open until the water flowing out of the taps has no bubbles in it. This is the only way to ensure that the boiler is full of water.
■ Close all water taps.
■ Switch off boiler.
■ Open all water taps and set to the central position.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Filling/emptying the boiler - 2

■ Open drain cock (Fig. 130). To do so, set the rocking lever (Fig. 130,1) in a vertical position. The boiler is drained to the outside using the drain cock.

■ Check whether the water has been drained completely from the boiler (approx. 12.5 litres).

▶ Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.

10.5 Cooker

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Cooker - 1

▶ Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.
Before using the cooker make sure that there is sufficient ventilation. Open windows or the skylight.
▶ Do not use gas cooker or gas oven for heating.
▶ Always protect your hands with cooking gloves or potholders when handling hot pots, pans and similar items. There is a risk of injury.

10.5.1 Gas cooker

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Gas cooker - 1

During activation and operation of the gas cooker, no flammable objects or highly inflammable objects such as dishcloths, napkins etc. must be near the gas cooker. Fire hazard!
The process of ignition must be visible from above and must not be covered by cooking pans placed on the cooker.
▶ Depending on the model, the gas cooker lid is held closed by a spring. When closing there is danger of getting injured!

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Gas cooker - 2

Do not use the glass gas cooker lid as a hob.
Do not close the gas cooker lid while the gas cooker is in operation.
Do not apply pressure on the gas cooker lid when it is closed.
Do not place hot cooking pans on the gas cooker lid.
Keep the gas cooker lid open after cooking until the burners are cool. Otherwise the glass plate could shatter.
Do not place hot objects such as cooking pans on the sink cover. The plastic can become deformed.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Gas cooker - 3

▶ Only use pots and pans whose diameter is appropriate for the gas cooker burners.
When the flame goes out, the thermocouple automatically cuts the gas supply.
▶ Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual "Gas cooker".

The vehicle kitchen unit is fitted with a three-burner gas cooker.

The gas cooker is equipped with electronic ignition.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Gas cooker - 4

natural_image Interior view of a gas stove with four numbered outlets (1, 2, 1) and no visible text or symbols on the stove itself.

Fig. 131 Operating controls for gas cooker

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Gas cooker - 5

natural_image Close-up of a vintage industrial control panel with rotary buttons and a dial (no readable text or symbols)

Fig. 132 Operating controls for gas cooker (alternative)

Switching on:

■ Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Cooker".
■ Open the gas cooker lid.
■ Turn the control knob (Fig. 131,1 or Fig. 132,1) on the burner you wish to use to the ignition position (large flame).
■ Press the control knob down and hold it.
■ Press the rocker switch (Fig. 131,2) if necessary until there is a flame.
■ Once the flame is burning, the control knob must be held down for 10 to 15 seconds, until the thermocouple automatically keeps the gas supply open.
■ Release the control knob and turn to the desired setting.

Switching off:

■ Turn the control knob to the 0-position. The flame fades.
■ Close the gas isolator tap "Cooker" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.

10.5.2 Gas oven

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Gas oven - 1

▶ Keep the ventilation openings on the gas oven open at all times.
There must be no flammable objects near the gas oven when it is being lit.
The oven flap must remain open when it is being lit.
▶ If ignition has not taken place, repeat the entire procedure. If necessary, check if there is gas and/or current in the gas oven.
▶ If the gas oven still does not work, close the gas isolator tap and notify your service centre.
If the burner flame is accidentally extinguished, switch the oven off and leave the burner off for at least 1 minute. Then ignite it again.
▶ When grilling, pull out the heat guard and leave the flap fully open.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Gas oven - 2

Before using the gas oven for the first time run it for 30 minutes at maximum temperature without any contents.
When the flame goes out, the thermocouple automatically cuts the gas supply.
▶ Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual "Gas oven".

1 2 3 DE T00406

Fig. 133 Gas oven

Switching on:

■ Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Oven".
■ Fully open the oven flap (Fig. 133,3).
■ Lightly press control knob (Fig. 133,2) and set to "☐" (oven) or "☐" (grill).
■ Press the control knob (Fig. 133,2) and hold it down for 5 to 10 seconds. Gas will stream into the burner.
■ Press the lighting switch (Fig. 133,1) repeatedly until there is a flame.
■ Once the flame is burning, the control knob must be held down for 10 to 15 seconds, until the thermocouple automatically keeps the gas supply open.
■ Release the control knob and turn to the desired setting.

Switching off:

■ Turn control knob (Fig. 133,2) to "○". The flame fades.
■ Close the gas isolator tap "Oven" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.

10.5.3 Microwave oven

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Microwave oven - 1

▶ Only qualified personnel may repair the microwave oven. Improper repairs can cause major risks to the user.
The protection device against the escape of microwave energy should never be removed.
▶ Use the microwave oven only if it has been properly installed.
▶ Only use the microwave oven when the door seal is free of damage.
▶ Never leave the microwave oven unattended when it is in operation.
▶ If there is smoke, keep the microwave oven closed, switch it off and interrupt the power supply.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Microwave oven - 2

Operate the microwave oven only with the rotary plate and the rotary cross in place.
▷ Use only crockery suitable for microwave use.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Microwave oven - 3

The microwave oven only functions with correct 240 V power supply. In the case of fluctuations of the voltage or of voltage below 230 V, the microwave oven switches itself off completely. Therefore, do not switch on additional 240 V appliances when the microwave oven is in operation. Particularly in southern countries it happens that the line voltage is described as having 230 V but it really does not amount to this value. So it may happen that the microwave oven cannot be operated in these countries.

▶ Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual "Microwave oven".

Wind Max Min 1 2 DET00364

Fig. 134 Operating controls for microwave oven

Switching on:

■ Open the door and place foodstuffs into the cooking area.
■ Close the door. A clicking noise can be heard when it engages.
■ Select the output on the control knob (Fig. 134,1).
■ Select the cooking time with the control knob (Fig. 134,2). Cooking begins.

The end of the cooking process is signalled by a signal tone. The microwave oven will switch off automatically.

Switching off:

■ Open the door and remove foodstuffs.

10.5.4 Extractor hood

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Extractor hood - 1

natural_image Close-up of a black metal HVAC vent with two circular components, labeled 1 and 2 (no text or symbols on the vent itself)

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Extractor hood - 2

natural_image Metallic rectangular object with a small square hole, possibly a vent or filter array (no text or symbols visible)

Fig. 135 Extractor hood Fig. 136 Extractor hood (alternative)

The cooking area is equipped with an extractor hood. The two-level fan blows the cooking steam directly outside.

■ Use the switch (example: Fig. 135,1) to turn the extractor hood on and off.
■ Use the switch (example: Fig. 135,2) to turn the cooker lamps on and off.

10.6 Refrigerator

During the journey, only operate the refrigerator via the 12 V power supply. At high ambient temperatures the refrigerator is unable to reach its full cooling power. At high external temperatures, the full cooling power of the cooling unit is only guaranteed if the refrigerator is ventilated sufficiently. In order to achieve a better ventilation the refrigerator ventilation grill can be removed.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Refrigerator - 1

When leaving the vehicle, always mount the refrigerator ventilation grill. Otherwise water can enter during rain.

10.6.1 Refrigerator ventilation grill

1 1 DET00206

Fig. 137 Refrigerator ventilation grill

Removal:

■ Turn screw (Fig. 137,1) one quarter turn using a coin.
■ Remove refrigerator ventilation grill.

10.6.2 Operation (Dometic 7 series with automatic power selection and frame heater)

Operating modes

The refrigerator is equipped with automatic power selection (AES). The AES automatically selects the optimal energy source and regulates the refrigerator operation. Manual intervention to select the type of power is possible but not required.

The AES selects from the following types of power:

• Solar installation 12 V
- 240 V AC
12 V DC
Gas

Choosing the available energy source highest on the list.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Operating modes - 1

Even when the 12 V power supply is switched off, a small electrical power flows which puts an extra load on the living area battery. Always switch off the refrigerator for a temporary lay-up.

1 2 3 4 Diametic 5 6 HYW07414

Fig. 138 Operating controls for the refrigerator (Dometic 7 series with AES and FH)

1 Frame heater (FH) button
2 Indicator lamp
3 Energy selector switch
4 Indicator lamps
5 Indicator lamps
6 Control knob for setting the temperature

240 V operation

If the 240 V power supply is connected, this energy source is selected as the first priority by the AES.

12 V operation

12 V operation is only selected by the AES if the vehicle's engine is running and the alternator supplies sufficient 12 V operating power.

Gas operation

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Gas operation - 1

▶ Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.
It is not permitted to operate the refrigerator with car gas.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Gas operation - 2

▷ Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator".

If the 240 V power supply is not connected and the vehicle's engine is not running the AES selects the gas supply. When selecting gas operation the ignition fuse is opened automatically so gas can get into the burner. At the same time the electronic ignition is activated. If the gas flame is extinguished, e.g. by blast of wind, the ignition is activated immediately and re-ignites the gas. When the gas operation is faulty, the "GAS" indicator lamp (Fig. 138,4) flashes red.

Change-over between energy sources

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Change-over between energy sources - 1

▶ Open flames are prohibited at petrol stations. If the stop takes longer than 15 minutes, the refrigerator has to be turned off at the energy selector switch.

When changing over between the different power sources there are forced delays built in the AES. This means, that after a change-over to a new energy source the refrigerator can not be operated immediately. When changing over from 12 V operation to gas operation, a 15-minute delay is built in the AES. This prevents a change-over to gas operation when the vehicle is stopped briefly and the engine is switched off (e.g. stop to fill tank).

Refrigerating temperature control

When turned on the first time the refrigerator automatically selects the middle thermostat position. This position can be adjusted manually by using the control knob (Fig. 138,6). The indicator lamps (Fig. 138,5) show the selected thermostat position. The refrigerating temperature for the three types of energy is set with the control knob. It takes a few hours till the refrigerator reaches its

normal operating temperature. When changing over the operating mode the thermostat setting will be maintained. The refrigerating temperature is retained regardless of the type of power being used.

Frame heater (FH)

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Frame heater (FH) - 1

If the frame heater is switched on, it will always consume current. Therefore, switch off the frame heater if the vehicle engine is off and the vehicle is not connected to the 240 V power supply.

High external temperatures and high humidity can cause drops of water to form on the metal frame of the freezer compartment. This is why the refrigerator is equipped with a frame heater for the freezer compartment. If the temperature and humidity are high, switch on the frame heater by pressing the button (Fig. 138,1). This prevents corrosion. If the frame heater is switched on, the indicator lamp (Fig. 138,2) will be lit.

Manual operation

Switching on:

■ Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator".
■ Select the energy type with the energy selector switch (Fig. 138,3). The respective indicator lamp (Fig. 138,4) lights up green.
■ Adjust refrigerating temperature with the control knob (Fig. 138,6). The indicator lamps (Fig. 138,5) show the selected thermostat position.

When the gas operation is faulty, the "GAS" indicator lamp (Fig. 138,4) flashes red.

When operated with 12 V, the refrigerator draws power only from the living area battery.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Switching on: - 1

▷ If the refrigerator is manually set to "12 V", it will constantly consume current. Therefore, switch over to gas operation when the vehicle engine is not running, and the vehicle is not connected to the 240 V power supply.

Switching off:

■ Turn the energy selector switch (Fig. 138,3) to "○". No indicator lamp (Fig. 138,4) is lit.
■ Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.
▶ Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual "Refrigerator".

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Switching off: - 1

10.6.3 Operation (Kissmann)

Operating modes

The refrigerator is only operated with 12 V or 24 V DC.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Operating modes - 1

Fig. 139 Operating controls outside the refrigerator

1 2 kissmann DE700611

Fig. 140 Operating controls in the refrigerator

Switching on:

■ Open the panel above the conversion door.
■ Switch on the refrigerator with the switch (Fig. 139,1). The indicator lamp (Fig. 139,2) shows it is in operation.
■ Turn the temperature controller (Fig. 140,1) from position "0" to "1".
If the interior lighting is not on, switch the switch (Fig. 140,2) to the "I" position.

Switching off:

■ Switch off the refrigerator with the switch (Fig. 139,1). The indicator lamp (Fig. 139,2) goes out.

Adjust the temperature:

■ Set the temperature with the temperature controller (Fig. 140,1).

  • Position "1" = lowest cooling power
  • Position "7" = highest cooling power

Defrosting:

■ Switch off the refrigerator.
■ Switch off the interior lighting with the switch (Fig. 140,2).
■ Open the doors of the refrigerator and the freezer compartment and leave them open.
■ Mop up the defrosting water with a sponge or cloth.
■ Clean the unit (see chapter 12).

When frozen food is kept in the freezer compartment, temperatures of -18 °C or lower are reached in the freezer compartment even when the temperature controller is set to a low setting.
The refrigerator temperature depends on the ambient temperature (installation location), the frequency the door is opened with and the charging. If necessary, readjust the temperature controller.
▶ Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Defrosting: - 1

10.6.4 Refrigerator door locking mechanism

The refrigerator has a separate freezer compartment. The specifications in this section correspondingly also apply to the door of the freezer compartment.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Refrigerator door locking mechanism - 1

During the journey the refrigerator door must always be closed and locked in the closed position.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Refrigerator door locking mechanism - 2

When the refrigerator is switched off, bring the refrigerator door into the ventilation position and lock it in place if possible. This prevents mould forming.

Depending on the model, it is possible to lock the refrigerator door in two positions:

  • Closed refrigerator door during travel and when the refrigerator is in operation
  • Slightly opened refrigerator door as a ventilation position when the refrigerator is switched off

Dometic 7 series with separate freezer compartment
1 2 3 HYW07716

Fig. 141 Locking of the refrigerator door/freezer compartment door (Dometic 7 series with separate freezer compartment)

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Refrigerator door locking mechanism - 4

natural_image Close-up of a white appliance with a handle and labeled component, showing front and side views (no readable text or symbols)

Fig. 142 Refrigerator door/freezer compartment door in ventilation position (Dometic 7 series with separate freezer compartment)

Opening:

■ Push the lock (Fig. 141,1) to the side, so that the open lock "G" (Fig. 141,3) is completely visible.
■ Use recessed grip to open refrigerator door/freezer compartment door.

■ Fully close the refrigerator door/freezer compartment door.
■ Push the lock (Fig. 141,1) to the side, so that the closed lock "?" (Fig. 141,2) is completely visible.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Opening: - 1

Locking in the ventilation position:

■ Slightly open refrigerator door/freezer compartment door.
■ Push the lock completely to the right. The door latch (Fig. 142,1) keeps the refrigerator door/freezer compartment door in a fixed position. The refrigerator door/freezer compartment door will then stay slightly open (Fig. 142).

Kissmann with separate freezer compartment

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Kissmann with separate freezer compartment - 1

natural_image Close-up of a metallic refrigerator with visible door and side panels, no text or symbols present.

Fig. 143 Refrigerator door in operation position

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Kissmann with separate freezer compartment - 2

natural_image Close-up of a metallic door with handle and clasp, showing internal components and a window (no visible text or symbols)

Fig. 144 Refrigerator door locked

Opening:

■ Rotate lock (Fig. 143,1) towards the outside.

■ Open the refrigerator door at the handle.

Closing:

■ Fully close the refrigerator door.

■ Turn lock (Fig. 144,1) towards the centre of the refrigerator.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Closing: - 1

▷ Locking in the ventilation position is not possible.

Bringing into the ventilation position:

■ Open the refrigerator door.

■ Turn the lock inwards.

■ Close the refrigerator door. The refrigerator door will stay slightly open.

10.7 Air conditioning unit

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Air conditioning unit - 1

The air conditioning unit only runs if the vehicle is connected to a 240 V power supply.
The external 240 V power supply must be protected by a fuse of at least 3 A. It is otherwise not possible to operate the air conditioning unit properly.

Truma 1 2 HYW07717

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Truma HYW07718

Fig. 145 Receiver Fig. 146 Remote control

The air conditioning unit is installed in the rear garage on the right behind a flap. The remote control (Fig. 146) for the air conditioning unit and the receiver (Fig. 145) is in the kitchen area.

To execute the individual switching commands, always point the remote control in the direction of the receiver.

Switching on:

■ Connect the vehicle to the 240 V power supply. The air conditioning unit is ready to operate.
■ Switch on the remote control with the switch (Fig. 146,7). The green indicator lamp (Fig. 145,1) indicates cooling mode.
■ Set the desired operating mode with the key (Fig. 146,8).

- "FAN": Only ventilation without cooling.

- "COMFORT": Cooling. The fan output and the room temperature can be set separately. The green indicator lamp in the receiver indicates the compressor is in operation and therefore cooling mode.

■ Set the desired fan output and room temperature with the keys (Fig. 146,3 and 4) if necessary. The arrow (Fig. 146,9) indicates the selected setting mode.

If the temperature set on the remote control is reached, the green indicator lamp goes out, the compressor is switched off and the circulation fan continues to run.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Switching on: - 1

An additional key switch (Fig. 145,2) is on the receiver, which can be used to switch the air conditioning unit off or on without remote control. If the air conditioning unit is switched on by means of this key switch, the operating mode set last on the remote control is automatically selected.

Switching off:

■ To switch off, press the key (Fig. 146,7) on the remote control again.
Condensation accumulates on the vaporiser in cooling mode. To counteract any formation of germs, operate the air conditioning unit about 5 to 10 minutes in the "FAN" and "HIGH" positions to dry the vaporiser.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Switching off: - 1

Timer The air conditioning unit can be switched on or off automatically from the current time up to 15 hours in advance with the integrated timer. Pre-programming up to a certain time is not possible.

■ To program, switch on the air conditioning unit with the key (Fig. 146,7) on the remote control.
■ Set the desired operating mode and room temperature with the keys (Fig. 146,8, 3 and 4).
■ Use the key (Fig. 146,5) to select the desired function (Fig. 146,1):

  • "ON": Switching on
  • "OFF": Switching off

■ Use the keys (Fig. 146,4) to select the desired switching time (1 to 15 hours). The arrow (Fig. 146,2) flashes and indicates the setting mode.
If "ON" (switch on) was selected, the air conditioning unit must be switched off again with the remote control after the setting process. The indicator lamp in the receiver flashes and confirms the programming.
■ The indicator lamp in the receiver flashes and confirms the programming if "OFF" (switch off) was selected. Do not switch off the air conditioning unit with the remote control.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Switching off: - 2

To go easy on the batteries in the remote control, the infrared transmitter can be covered by hand and the remote control then switched off after the "OFF" programming. In this way no signal is transferred to the receiver and the programming is retained.
The key (Fig. 146,6) is used to send the settings of the remote control repeatedly to the receiver.
▶ Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.

10.8 Dishwasher

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Dishwasher - 1

▶ Repairs to the dishwasher may only be carried out be qualified personnel.
▶ Detergents for dishwashers are very corrosive. Therefore, never store detergents on the sink or within reach of children and never use for other purposes.
▶ Do not open the dishwasher door when the program is running or directly at the end of the program. Hot steam can escape.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Dishwasher - 2

▷ Use only dishwasher-proof crockery.
▷ Fill the salt container with special salt before the first washing cycle to protect the dishwasher against damage from chalk.
▶ Further information is available in the separate instruction manual "Dish-washer".

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Dishwasher - 3

1 2 3 4 6 5 DE T00614

Fig. 147 Operating controls for the dishwasher

1 On/Off button
2 Button for setting the water softener
3 Multi-display
4 Display lamps and indicator lamps
5 Button for delayed start
6 Keys for program selection

The multi-display can show the following information:

  • Set hardness level
  • Set start time
    ● Remaining time of the washing program
  • Error code

The indicator lamps show when there is no salt or rinsing liquid.

Switching on:

■ Fill in detergent and rinsing liquid if necessary.
■ Close the door.

■ Press the "On/Off" button (Fig. 147,1). All program displays (Fig. 147,6) light up.
■ Press switch (Fig. 147,6) for desired program. All other program displays go out.

The three upper display lamps (Fig. 147,4) provide information about the program sequence:

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Dishwasher - 5

Cleaning cycle in operation

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Dishwasher - 6

Drying cycle in operation

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Dishwasher - 7

Program cycle ended

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Dishwasher - 8

Switching off:

Do not switch off the dishwasher until the display lamp "→" indicates the end of the program.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Dishwasher - 9

■ Press the "On/Off" button (Fig. 147,1).

■ Pull door lock upward and open the door.

If the vehicle is not going to be used for a long period or if it is not heated when there is a risk of frost, pump off all water from the dishwasher. This prevents deposits and frost damage.

Pumping out water:

■ Shut off the water supply to the dishwasher.

■ Switch on the dishwasher. The pump pumps the remaining water out of the pipes and the machine.

■ Switch off the dishwasher.

10.9 Central vacuum cleaner

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Central vacuum cleaner - 1

▶ Do not suck up any sharp-edged or pointed objects such as needles, nails or razor blades. Risk of injury when changing the filter!

▶ Do not suck in any flammable or combustible liquids. Fire hazard!

▶ Do not allow children to play with the vacuum cleaner.

▶ Keep hair, loose clothing fingers and other parts of the body away from the intake openings.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Central vacuum cleaner - 2

Operate the vacuum cleaner only when a dust bag and all filters have been inserted.

Do not suck in any hot or smoldering objects such as cigarettes or hot ash.

Do not suck in any large objects such as paper tissues. These could block the hose.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Central vacuum cleaner - 3

The vacuum cleaner can get very hot during operation. If this happens, the motor switches itself off automatically. The vacuum cleaner is ready for use again after a cooling-down period of approx. 1 hour.

▶ Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.

Connections In the vehicle there are two hose connections and an intake opening with a foot pedal.

1 2 3 DET00615

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Central vacuum cleaner - 5

natural_image Close-up of a metal bracket with two labeled parts (1 and 2) against a wooden surface, no text or symbols visible.

Fig. 148 Hose connection Fig. 149 Intake opening with foot pedal

Operation The vacuum cleaner can be operated in various modes.

Connecting a hose:

■ Lift the flap (Fig. 148,1) on the hose connection.
■ Rotate the hose slightly and push it gently into the opening (Fig. 148,3).
As soon as the contacts on the end of the hose touch the contacts in the hose connection (Fig. 148,2), the vacuum cleaner starts up automatically.

Activating the intake opening:

■ Tilt the foot pedal (Fig. 149,2) to the right. The vacuum cleaner starts up.

■ Brush the dust in front of the intake opening (Fig. 149,1). The dust is sucked in.

Switching off the vacuum cleaner:

■ When the hose is connected: Rotate the hose slightly and pull it out of the connection.

■ When the intake opening is in operation: Tilt the foot pedal to the left.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Central vacuum cleaner - 6

▶ Only change the bag when the vacuum cleaner is switched off.

1 2 DE T00617

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Central vacuum cleaner - 8

natural_image Close-up of a mechanical component with labeled parts (1 and 2), no readable text or symbols beyond labels

Fig. 150 Flap for dust bag Fig. 151 Dust bag

Changing the dust bag:

■ Press the unlocking device (Fig. 150,1) upwards.
■ Open the flap (Fig. 150,2).
■ Carefully pull the dust bag (Fig. 151,2) off the pipe tube (Fig. 151,1) and remove it.
■ Insert a new dust bag into the opening.

■ Attach the new dust bag onto the short tube. When doing this, first press the cardboard disk on the dust bag into the rear top corner and then pull the front part of the cardboard disk upwards.
■ Close flap. Lock must audibly lock into place.

Chapter overview

This chapter contains instructions regarding the sanitary fittings of the vehicle. The instructions address the following topics:

  • water tank
  • waste water tank
  • complete water system
  • toilet compartment
  • toilet

11.1 Water supply, general

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Water supply, general - 1

▶ Fill water tank from supply systems that have been verified to provide drinking water quality.
▶ Only use such hoses or containers when filling that have been approved for use with drinking water.
▶ Thoroughly rinse filling hose or container with drinking water before use (2 to 3 times capacity).
▶ Empty filling hose or container completely after use and close openings of the filling hose or container.
▶ Water left standing in the water tank or in the water pipes becomes undrinkable after a short period. Therefore, before each use of the vehicle, thoroughly clean the water pipes and the water tank. After each use of the vehicle completely empty the water tank and the water pipes.
In the case of lay-ups lasting more than a week disinfect the water system before using the vehicle.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Water supply, general - 2

If the vehicle is not used for several days or if it is not heated when there is a risk of frost, empty the entire water system. Leave the water taps on in central position. Leave the safety/drainage valve (if there is one) and all drain cocks open. Frost damage to appliances, frost damage to the vehicle and deposits in water-carrying components can be avoided in this way.
The water pump will overheat without water and can get damaged. Never operate water pump when the water tank is empty.

The vehicle is equipped with a fitted water tank. An electric water pump pumps the water to the individual water taps. Opening a water tap automatically switches on the water pump and pumps water to the tap.

The waste water tank collects the waste water. The water level in the water and waste water tanks can be checked on the panel.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Water supply, general - 3

Before using the water fittings, the 12 V power supply on the panel must be switched on. Otherwise the water pump will not work.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Water supply, general - 4

natural_image Industrial piping and valve assembly with labeled component (no readable text or symbols)

Fig. 152 Water pump

Position of the water pump

The water pump (Fig. 152,1) is mounted on the outside of the water tank.

11.2 Water tank

11.2.1 Drinking water filler neck with cap

1 2 DET00209

Fig. 153 Cap for the drinking water filler neck

1 2 PSL00003

Fig. 154 Cap for the drinking water filler neck (alternative)

The drinking water filler neck is on the right or left side of the vehicle, depending on the model.

The drinking water filler neck is labelled by the word "WASSER" (water) (Fig. 153,1) or marked by the symbol "(Fig. 154,1). The cap is opened or closed using the key for the external flap locks.

Opening:

■ Insert key into locking cylinder (Fig. 153,2) and turn a quarter turn in an anticlockwise direction.
■ Remove cap.
■ Fill the water tank with drinking water.

Closing:

■ Place the cap on the drinking water filler neck.
■ Turn key one quarter turn in a clockwise direction.
■ Remove the key.
■ Check that the cap sits firmly on the drinking water filler neck.

11.2.2 Water drainage

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Water drainage - 1

natural_image Close-up of industrial piping and valves with no visible text or symbols

1 2 DET00265

Fig. 155 Water tank drain cock Fig. 156 Water drain neck

Depending on the model, the drain cock (Fig. 155,1) is installed in the double floor on either the left or right side of the vehicle. The drain cock is labelled by the word "Wasser" (water).

A cap (Fig. 156,2) closes the water drain neck (Fig. 156,1).

A hose line can be connected to the water drain neck (Fig. 156,1).

11.2.3 Filling with water

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Filling with water - 1

When filling the water tank, observe the maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle. Luggage must be reduced accordingly when the water tank is full.

To fill the water tank with drinking water, proceed as follows:

■ Open drinking water filler neck (Fig. 153).
- Fill the water tank with drinking water. Use a water hose, a water canister with a funnel or similar for filling.
■ Close drinking water filler neck.

11.2.4 Draining water

To empty the water tank, proceed as follows:

■ Unlock and remove the cap (Fig. 156,2) from the water drain neck (Fig. 156,1) by turning it a quarter turn in a clockwise direction.
■ Mount suitable hose to the water drain neck (Fig. 156,1) or place appropriate container under the water drain neck.
■ Open the external flap (see section 7.2).
■ Open drain cock. The water will drain.
■ Close drain cock.
■ Close the external flap.
■ Replace the cap and lock it by turning it a quarter turn in an anticlockwise direction.

11.3 Waste water tank

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Waste water tank - 1

In case of frost add so much anti-freeze (such as kitchen salt) to the waste water tank so that the waste water cannot freeze.
▷ If the living area heater is out of order, the waste water tank no longer is sufficiently protected against frost.
▷ Never pour boiling water directly into the sink outlet. Boiling water could cause deformation and leaks in the waste water pipe system.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Waste water tank - 2

Only empty the waste water tank at disposal stations, camping sites or caravan sites especially provided for this purpose.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Waste water tank - 3

natural_image Close-up of a mechanical device with a labeled component and mounting base (no readable text or symbols)

1 2 DE TOO265

Fig. 157 Drain cock for waste water tank Fig. 158 Waste water drain neck

Depending on the model, the drain cock (Fig. 157,1) is installed in the double floor on either the left or right side of the vehicle. The drain cock can be accessed via the rear garage. The drain cock is labelled by the word "Abwasser" (waste water).

A cap (Fig. 158,2) closes the waste water drain neck (Fig. 158,1).

A hose line can be connected to the waste water drain neck (Fig. 158,1).

Emptying:

■ Unlock and remove the cap (Fig. 158,2) from the waste water drain neck (Fig. 158,1) by turning it a quarter turn in a clockwise direction.
■ Mount suitable hose to the waste water drain neck or place appropriate container under the waste water drain neck.
■ Open the external flap (see section 7.2).
■ Open drain cock (Fig. 157,1). The waste water will run out.
■ Close drain cock.
■ Close the external flap.
■ Replace the cap and lock it by turning it a quarter turn in an anticlockwise direction.

11.4 Odour seal

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Odour seal - 1

natural_image Close-up of two black cylindrical mechanical components with labeled parts (1 and 2), no visible text or symbols beyond labels.

Fig. 159 Odour seal

In order to prevent odours occurring in the waste water system, the vehicle - depending on the model - has been equipped with odour seals (Fig. 159,1). The odour seals are installed in the waste water pipes.

Clean the odour seals every two years at the latest. To do so, unscrew and remove the bottom cover (Fig. 159,2).

11.5 Filling the water system

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Filling the water system - 1

When filling the water tank, observe the maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle. Luggage must be reduced accordingly when the water tank is full.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Filling the water system - 2

The water pump will overheat without water and can get damaged. Never operate water pump when the water tank is empty.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Filling the water system - 3

The water system has several drain cocks (yellow) for emptying. The water quantity can be monitored on the panel while the water tank is filled.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Filling the water system - 4

natural_image Interior view of a mechanical or electrical assembly with hoses and pipes (no visible text or symbols)

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Filling the water system - 5

natural_image Close-up of industrial piping and valves with no visible text or symbols

Fig. 160 Drain cock on heater Fig. 161 Drain cock on water pump

■ Position the vehicle horizontally.
■ Switch on 12 V power supply on the panel.
■ Switch on water pump on panel.
■ Clean or disinfect water system.
■ Close all drain cocks (Fig. 160,1 and Fig. 161,1 and 2). To do this, set the rocking levers in a horizontal position.

■ Close all water taps.
■ Fill the water tank with drinking water.
■ Set all the water taps to "Hot" and open them. The water pump is turned on. The warm water pipes are filled with water.
- Keep the taps open until the water flowing out of the taps has no bubbles in it. This is the only way to ensure that the boiler is full of water.
■ Set all water taps to "Cold" and leave them open. This will fill the cold water pipes with water.
- Keep the taps open until the water flowing out of the taps has no bubbles in it.
■ Close all water taps.

11.6 Emptying the water system

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Emptying the water system - 1

If the vehicle is not used for several days or if it is not heated when there is a risk of frost, empty the entire water system. Leave the water taps on in central position. Leave the safety/drainage valve (if there is one) and all drain cocks open. Frost damage to appliances, frost damage to the vehicle and deposits in water-carrying components can be avoided in this way.
Always switch off the water pump on the panel when emptying the water system. Otherwise the water pump runs until it overheats or the battery is empty.
The water system has several drain cocks (yellow) for emptying.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Emptying the water system - 2

To empty and ventilate the water system, proceed as follows. This prevents frost damage and deposits:

■ Position the vehicle horizontally.
■ Switch off water pump on panel.
■ Switch off the 12 V power supply on the panel.
■ Shut off the boiler (see section 10.4).
■ Open all drain cocks (Fig. 160,1 and Fig. 161,1 and 2). To do this, set the rocking lever in a vertical position.
■ Unscrew the cap of the water tank.
■ Remove the cap from the waste water drain neck and open the drain cock.
■ Open all water taps and set to the central position.
■ Hang the shower handset up in the shower position.
■ Check whether the water tank is completely empty.
■ Empty the waste water tank. Take note of the environmental tips in this chapter.
■ Empty Thetford cassette. Take note of the environmental tips in this chapter.
■ Clean the water tank and then rinse it out thoroughly.
■ Let the water system dry for as long as possible.
■ After emptying, leave all water taps on in the central position.
■ Leave all drain cocks open.

11.7 Toilet compartment

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Toilet compartment - 1

Do not transport any loads in the shower tray. The shower tray or other items of equipment in the toilet compartment can be damaged.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Toilet compartment - 2

For ventilation purposes during or after a shower, and for drying wet clothing, close the toilet compartment door and open the window or the toilet compartment skylight. This improves the air circulation.
▷ Close the shower curtain completely when showering, so that no water is able to enter the area between the wash room wall and the shower tray.
After taking a shower, rinse soap residue from the shower tray, otherwise cracks can appear in the shower tray over time.
▶ After using the shower, wipe it dry to prevent moisture from collecting.
▶ Further information about cleaning the toilet compartment can be found in the section 12.2.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Toilet compartment - 3

natural_image Close-up of a circular button component with a textured square border and a numbered label '1' pointing to it (no text or symbols on the button itself)

Fig. 162 Light switch

The switches for the toilet compartment lighting are installed in different places in the toilet compartment depending on the model.

For example, the light switch (Fig. 162,1) of the toilet compartment is located under the bathroom cabinet.

11.8 Toilet

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Toilet - 1

▷ If there is any risk of frost and the vehicle is not heated, empty the sewage tank (cassette).
Do not sit on the lid of the toilet. The lid is not designed to bear the weight of a person and could break.
Use a suitable chemical for this toilet. The ventilation will merely remove the odour but not germs and gases. Germs and gases will have a detrimental effect on the sealing rubbers.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Toilet - 2

▶ Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Toilet - 3

Only empty the sewage tank (cassette) at disposal stations, at camping sites or caravan sites, that are especially provided for this purpose.

11.8.1 Swivel toilet

The flushing of the Thetford toilet is fed directly from the water system of the vehicle. The toilet bowl can be moved into the optimal position.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Swivel toilet - 1

natural_image 3D rendering of a white toilet with lid and base, labeled with number 1 (no text or symbols on the toilet itself)

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Swivel toilet - 2

natural_image 3D rendered mechanical component with a curved top and base, labeled with number 1 (no text or symbols on the object itself)

Fig. 163 Thetford toilet bowl, swivelling Fig. 164 Thetford toilet bowl, swivelling (alternative)

The operating unit is located close to the toilet bowl.

THETFORD 1 2 HYW06524

Fig. 165 Flush button/indicator lamp Thetford toilet

THETFORD 2 HYW07924 1

Fig. 166 Flush button/indicator lamp Thetford toilet (alternative)

Flushing:

■ Before flushing open the sliding trap of the Thetford toilet. To do this, push the slide lever (Fig. 163,1 or Fig. 164,1) in an anticlockwise direction.
■ For flushing, press the blue flush button (Fig. 165,1 or Fig. 166,1).
■ After flushing close the sliding trap. To do this push the slide lever in a clockwise direction.

The indicator lamp (Fig. 165,2 or Fig. 166,2) goes on whenever the Thetford cassette has to be emptied.

Emptying:

■ Turn the slide lever (Fig. 163,1 or Fig. 164,1) in a clockwise direction. The sliding trap is closed. To empty, the sliding trap in the Thetford toilet must be closed.
■ Remove the Thetford cassette and empty it as described in sections 11.8.3 and 11.8.4.

11.8.2 Vacuum toilet (Dometic)

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Vacuum toilet (Dometic) - 1

▶ Only flush the toilet if the toilet lid is closed.

The flushing of the toilet is fed directly from the water system of the vehicle.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Vacuum toilet (Dometic) - 2

natural_image Interior view of a white toilet in a bathroom with numbered labels (1, 2, 3) and no visible text or symbols on the toilet itself.

3 2 1 Dometic DET00489

Fig. 167 Vacuum toilet Fig. 168 Vacuum toilet panel

Putting into operation:

■ Turn on power supply. The yellow LED (Fig. 168,1) on the panel (Fig. 167,1) turns on for ca. 1 minute. A vacuum is generated in the system.
If the green LED (Fig. 168,3) on the panel lights up, lift the pedal (Fig. 167,3) briefly, so that some water runs into the toilet bowl (Fig. 167,2) and the stopper on the bottom is covered with water.

The vacuum toilet is ready for operation.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Putting into operation: - 1

Flushing only functions if the green LED is lit.

Flushing:

■ Close the lid of the toilet.
■ Press down the pedal (Fig. 167,3) for several seconds.
■ Briefly lift the pedal, so that some water runs into the toilet bowl (Fig. 167,2) and the stopper on the bottom is covered with water.

The red LED (Fig. 168,2) lights up if the cassette must be emptied or removed.

Removing the cassette:

■ Remove the cassette and empty it as described in sections 11.8.3 and 11.8.4.

11.8.3 Removing the cassette

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Removing the cassette - 1

The sewage tank (cassette) can only be taken out if the sliding trap is closed.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Removing the cassette - 2

natural_image Close-up of hands holding a white rectangular device with a small attached component, labeled 1 and 2 (no text or symbols on the device itself)

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Removing the cassette - 3

natural_image Interior view of a mechanical device showing internal components and labeled parts (no readable text or symbols)

Fig. 169 Flap for the toilet cassette Fig. 170 Thetford cassette

■ Open the flap for the cassette on the outside of the vehicle. Insert the key into the locking cylinder of the push-button lock (Fig. 169,1) and turn a quarter turn.
■ Remove the key.

■ Press both push-button locks (Fig. 169,2) simultaneously with your thumb and open the flap for the cassette.

■ Press the release (Fig. 170,1) and pull out the toilet cassette on the handle (Fig. 170,2).

11.8.4 Emptying the cassette

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Emptying the cassette - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

Fig. 171 Emptying the Thetford cassette

■ Take the cassette to a disposal point especially provided for this purpose. As you do this, point the drainage neck upwards.

■ If possible, turn the drainage neck upwards.

■ Remove the cap of the drainage neck.

■ Point the cassette with the drainage neck downwards.

■ For Thetford cassettes: Activate the aeration knob with your thumb. The cassette empties.

■ Close drainage neck with the cap.

■ If the drainage neck has been turned upwards: Return the drainage neck to its original position.

■ Push the cassette back to its original position.

■ Ensure that the cassette is secured by the retaining clip.

■ Lock the flap for the cassette.

Chapter overview

This chapter contains instructions regarding the care of the vehicle.

The instructions address the following topics:

• exterior of the vehicle
- interior
- water system
- extractor hood
- toilets
- winter operation

At the end of the chapter there is a checklist of measures you must carry out if you are not going to use the vehicle for an extended period of time.

The checklist address the following topics:

  • temporary lay-up
  • winter lay-up
  • start-up after a lay-up

12.1 External care

12.1.1 Washing with a high-pressure cleaner

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Washing with a high-pressure cleaner - 1

Do not clean the tyres with a high-pressure cleaner. The tyres might be damaged.
Do not spray external applications (deco-films) directly with the high-pressure cleaner. The external applications could come off.

Before cleaning the vehicle with a high-pressure cleaner, observe the operating instructions of the high-pressure cleaner.

When cleaning with the nozzle for circular jet between the vehicle and the cleaning nozzle, maintain a minimum distance of approx. 700 mm.

Take into consideration that the jet of water comes out of the cleaning nozzle with pressure. The vehicle may be damaged by incorrect handling of the high-pressure cleaner. The temperature of the water should not be above 60 °C.

Keep the jet of water in constant movement during the washing process. Do not direct the water jet at clearances, built-in electrical parts, plugs, seals, the ventilation grill or the skylights. The vehicle may be damaged or water may enter the interior.

12.1.2 Washing the vehicle

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Washing the vehicle - 1

▷ Never clean the vehicle in the car wash. Water can enter the refrigerator grills, the waste gas vents, the ventilation of the extractor hoods or the forced ventilations. The vehicle could be damaged.

■ Wash the vehicle only on a washing site intended for this purpose. Avoid full sunshine. Observe environmental measures.
■ Only clean external applications and synthetic parts with plenty of warm water, dish washing liquid and soft cloth.
■ Wash down the vehicle with plenty of water, a clean sponge or a soft brush. In the case of stubborn dirt add dish washing liquid to the water.
■ Painted exterior walls may also be cleaned with a caravan cleaner.

■ Add-on parts made of glass-fibre reinforced plastic (GRP) require a regular follow-up treatment with a polisher. This way these parts will not turn yellow and the sealing of the surface remains intact.
■ Treat rubber seals of doors and storage flaps with talc.
■ Treat locking cylinder of doors and storage flaps with graphite dust.

12.1.3 Windows of acrylic glass

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Windows of acrylic glass - 1

Acrylic glass windows are delicate and require very careful handling.

▷ Never rub acrylic glass windows dry as dust particles might damage the surface!
▶ Only clean acrylic glass windows with plenty of warm water, some dish washing liquid and a soft cloth.
▷ Never use glass cleaning agents with chemical, abrasive or alcohol-containing additives. Premature brittleness of the panes and associated cracks may result from their use.
Avoid contact of cleansing agents used for the body (e.g. tar- or silicone-removing agents) with acrylic glass.
Do not clean vehicle in car wash.
Do not attach stickers to the acrylic glass windows.
▶ Having cleaned the vehicle rinse acrylic glass with sufficient clear water.
▷ Treat rubber seals with glycerin.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Windows of acrylic glass - 2

An acrylic glass cleanser with antistatic effect is suitable for a follow-up treatment. Small scratches can be treated with an acrylic glass polish. These agents are available at the accessories shop.

12.1.4 Underbody

The underbody of the vehicle is partly coated with an age-resistant underbody protection. Should the underbody protection be damaged, repair immediately. Do not treat areas coated with underbody protection with spray oil.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Underbody - 1

Only use products approved by the manufacturer. Our authorised dealers and service centres will be happy to advise you.

12.1.5 Waste water tank

Clean the waste water tank after every use of the vehicle.

Cleaning:

■ Empty the waste water tank.
■ Thoroughly rinse out the waste water tank with fresh water.
■ If possible, clean waste water sensors through the cleaning opening by hand.

12.1.6 Entrance step

If the entrance step is lubricated, coarse particles of dirt can settle on the lubricant during the journey and cause damage to the operating mechanism of the entrance step. Therefore, do not lubricate the moving parts of the entrance step.

12.1.7 Driver's cabin insulation mat (model I)

Clean the insulation mat for the driver's cabin with clear, lukewarm water. Remove heavier soiling with a cloth and some white spirits. Afterwards, immediately rinse the cleaned area with lukewarm water.

12.1.8 Electrical-hydraulic steady legs

Cleaning:

■ Clean the steady legs regularly. Dirt and other contamination can impair its functioning.

Spraying:

If the steady legs are to remain extended for any length of time, spray silicone spray onto the lifting cylinder once per week. In a salty environment, reduce that interval to two or three days.

■ Spray the outside of the entire steady legs with an anti-rust agent (e.g. Tectyl) once annually. This protects the steady legs against corrosion and rust.

12.2 Interior care

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Interior care - 1

▷ If possible, treat stains immediately.

Acrylic glass windows are delicate and require very careful handling (see section 12.1.3).

▷ Synthetic parts in the toilet and living area are very delicate and should be treated with care. Do not use solvents, alcohol-containing cleansers or scourers containing sand. This procedure will help you to avoid brittleness and formation of cracks.

Do not pour any corrosive agents into the drain holes. Never pour boiling water directly into the drain holes. Corrosive agents and boiling water cause damage to drainage pipes and siphon traps.

Do not use vinegar based products to clean the toilet and water system, or for decalcification of the water system. Vinegar-based products may cause damage to seals or parts of the installation. Use standard decalcifying products for decalcification.

▷ Save water. Mop up all remaining water.

▷ Vacuum off carpets and cushions with a suitable brush attachment.

For information about the use of maintenance products, our representatives and service centres will be glad to advise.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Interior care - 2

■ Surface and knobs of furniture, lamps and synthetic parts in the toilet and living area should be cleaned with water and a wool cloth. A mild cleanser may be added to the water. If required, use furniture polish for the painted surfaces.

■ Clean upholstery with dry foam specially manufactured for the use on upholstery or with the foam of a mild detergent. Do not wash upholstery. Always have it cleaned. Protect upholstery from direct sunlight so that it does not lose its colour.

■ Clean the imitation leather coverings by wiping them off in circular motion with a soft cloth or sponge and a mixture of lukewarm water and mild lather. Treat stubborn stains with a soft brush. For very hard-to-remove stains, use a mixture of alcohol and water mixed in a 1:1 ratio. Afterwards, wipe it off with soap water. Do not use any products that contain solvents or abrasives.

■ Wipe off Teflon coverings with an absorbent cloth or sponge and use a mild household detergent.

Never rub wet or oily stains. Instead, dab them with an absorbent cloth. Work from the outside to the inside to prevent spreading the stain.

When treating solid or dried stains, always try to scrape them off with a dull knife or scraper or remove them off with a soft brush. Afterwards, dab off any residue with a moist cloth.

■ Curtains and net curtains should be dry cleaned.

■ Vacuum clean the carpet, if necessary clean with carpet shampoo.

■ Clean PVC-floor covering with a mild, soapy cleanser for PVC floors. Do not place carpet on wet PVC-floor covering. The carpet and the PVC-floor covering may stick together.

■ Never clean the sink or the gas cooker with a scourer. Avoid anything which may cause scratching or grooves.

■ Clean gas cooker only with a moist cloth. Prevent any water from penetrating the gas cooker. Water may damage the gas cooker.

■ Brush insect screens on doors, windows and skylights with a soft brush or vacuum with the brush attachment of the vacuum cleaner.

■ Brush blinds with a soft brush or vacuum with the brush attachment of the vacuum cleaner. Grease or stubborn dirt may be removed with a mild soap at 30 °C (curd soap).

■ Brush Roman shades with a soft brush or vacuum with the brush attachment of the vacuum cleaner. Grease or stubborn dirt may be removed with a mild soap at 30 °C (curd soap).

■ Unrolled seat belts can be cleaned with warm soapsuds. The seat belt must be completely dry before being rolled up.

12.3 Water system

12.3.1 Cleaning the water tank

■ Empty the water tank and close the drainage opening.

■ Remove the cap of the water tank.

■ Fill water tank with water and some washing-up liquid (do not use any scourers).

■ Using a trade standard brush for washing dishes, scrub the water tank until there is no longer any visible deposit.

■ Scrub also the pump housing.

■ If possible, clean fresh water sensors through the cleaning openings by hand

■ Rinse water tank with copious amounts of drinking water.

12.3.2 Cleaning the water pipes

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Cleaning the water pipes - 1

▶ Only use suitable cleaning agents as sold by the specialist trade.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Cleaning the water pipes - 2

▷ Collect any emerging mixture of water and cleaning agent for correct disposal.

■ Empty the water system.
■ Close all drain holes and drain cocks.
■ Fill mixture of water and cleaning agent into the water tank. Observe the manufacturer's instructions regarding the mixing ratio.
■ Open the drain cocks one by one.
■ Leave the drain cocks open until the mixture of water and cleaning agent has reached the respective drain.
■ Close the drain cocks.
■ Set all the water taps to "Hot" and open them.
■ Leave the water taps open until the mixture of water and cleaning agent has reached the drain.
■ Set all water taps to "Cold" and open them.
■ Leave the water taps open until the mixture of water and cleaning agent has reached the drain.
■ Close all water taps.
■ Flush the toilet several times.
- Allow the cleaning agent to act in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
■ Empty the water system. Collect the mixture of water and cleaning agent for correct disposal.
■ For rinsing fill the entire water system with drinking water and empty again several times over.

12.3.3 Disinfecting the water system

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Disinfecting the water system - 1

▶ Only use suitable disinfectants as sold by the specialist trade.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Disinfecting the water system - 2

▷ Collect any emerging mixture of water and disinfectant for correct disposal.

■ Empty the water system.
■ Close all drain holes and drain cocks.
- Fill mixture of water and disinfectant into the water tank. Observe the manufacturer's instructions regarding the mixing ratio.
■ Open the drain cocks one by one.
■ Leave the drain cocks open until the mixture of water and disinfectant has reached the respective drain.
■ Close the drain cocks.

■ Set all the water taps to "Hot" and open them.
■ Leave the water taps open until the mixture of water and disinfectant has reached the drain.
■ Set all water taps to "Cold" and open them.
■ Leave the water taps open until the mixture of water and disinfectant has reached the drain.
■ Close all water taps.
■ Flush the toilet several times.
■ Allow the disinfectant to act in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
■ Empty the water system. Collect the mixture of water and disinfectant for correct disposal.
■ For rinsing fill the entire water system with drinking water and empty again several times over.

12.4 Extractor hood

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Extractor hood - 1

▶ Prior to carrying out work on the device, turn off the power supply.

Clean the extractor hood filter occasionally. How often cleaning is necessary depends on how often the extractor hood is used. Do not wait to clean the filter until the performance of the extractor hood has noticeably decreased.

2 1 DET00491

Fig. 172 Extractor hood

Cleaning the filter:

■ Pull down the filter (Fig. 172,2) with the handle (Fig. 172,1).
■ Wash the filter with warm water and some washing-up liquid.
■ Let the filter dry completely and re-install.

12.5 Vacuum toilet (Dometic)

If the toilet will not be used for a longer period of time, for example for Winter lay up, the toilet must be cleaned and completely emptied.

3 2 1 DET00492

Fig. 173 Vacuum toilet valve

Emptying valve:

Empty the entire water system.

■ Press the toilet pedal several times, until no more water flows.
■ Empty the cassette at a disposal station authorized for this purpose and clean it.
■ Turn off power supply.
■ Remove cover (Fig. 173,3).
■ Unscrew the cap (Fig. 173,2).
■ Place a suitable container under the valve (Fig. 173,1).
■ Press the pedal several times until water no longer comes out of the valve.
■ Screw the cap back on and attach cover.

12.6 Winter care

De-icing salt damages the underbody and the parts open to water spray. We recommend that you wash the vehicle more frequently during wintertime. Mechanical and surface treated parts and the underside are under particular strain, and should therefore be cleaned thoroughly.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Winter care - 1

If there is any risk of frost, always run heater at a minimum of 15^ C. Switch the circulation fan (if there is one) to automatic. In the case of extreme external temperatures, the furniture flaps and doors should be left slightly open. The inflowing warm air can help prevent the freezing of water pipes, for example, and counteract the formation of condensation in the storage spaces.
If there is any risk of frost, cover the outside surface of the windows with winter insulation mats.

12.6.1 Preparations

■ Check the vehicle for paint and rust damage. Repair damage as necessary.
■ Make certain that water cannot penetrate the automatic floor ventilation system and the heater.
■ Use a wax-based rust inhibitor to protect the metal parts of the underbody.
■ Use appropriate protection for external painted surfaces.

12.6.2 Winter operation

During winter operation, condensation develops when the vehicle is occupied under low-temperature conditions. To ensure good interior air quality and avoid vehicle damage from condensation, sufficient ventilation is essential.

■ When heating the vehicle, the heater should be at the highest setting and roof storage cabinets, curtains and blinds should be opened. This ensures optimal ventilation.

In the morning, lift up all cushions, air out storage boxes and dry any damp areas.

▷ If condensation has still developed, just wipe it off.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Winter operation - 1

12.6.3 At the end of the winter season

■ Thoroughly clean the underbody of the vehicle and the engine. When this is done, corrosion-inducing anti-freeze agents (salts, alkaline residues) are removed.

■ Clean the exterior and use regular car wax to protect metal surfaces.

12.7 Lay-up

12.7.1 Temporary lay-up

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Temporary lay-up - 1

If the vehicle has been stationary for a long period (approx. 10 months) have the braking and gas systems checked by an authorised specialist workshop.

▶ Take into consideration that water is undrinkable after only a short time.

▶ Animal damage to cables can lead to short circuits. Fire hazard!

Animals (especially mice) can cause great damage to the interior of the vehicle. This is especially true if the animal remains undisturbed in a parked vehicle.

The animals can get into the vehicle at an opportune moment and hide from view.

To keep damages from animals to a minimum or to avoid them altogether, regularly check the vehicle for damage or animal traces. This is especially important approx. 24 hours after parking the car in storage.

If animal traces are found, contact your authorised dealer or service centre. If damage to cables has occurred, they can result in short circuits. The vehicle could catch fire.

Before laying up the vehicle, go through the following checklist:

Base vehicle

Activities Done
Completely fill fuel tank. This prevents corrosion damage within the fuel tank system
Jack up vehicle so that the wheels do not bear any load, or move vehicle every 4 weeks. This prevents any pressure points from occurring on tyres and wheel bearings
Protect the tyres from direct exposure to the sun. Danger of formation of cracks!
Inflate tyres up to the recommended maximum pressure
Always provide for sufficient ventilation in the underbody area
▷ Humidity or lack of oxygen e.g. by covering with plastic film may cause optical irregularities to the underbody.
In addition observe the notes in the operating manual of the base vehicle

Body

All vents should be sealed with the appropriate caps and all other openings (apart from forced ventilations) should also be sealed. This prevents animals (e.g. mice) from gaining entry
Air the interior, all storage compartments accessible from the outside, and the parking space (e.g. garage) every 3 weeks in order to prevent the occurrence of condensation and resulting mould formation

Interior

Place upholstery in an upright position for ventilation, and cover
Clean refrigerator
Allow refrigerator and freezer compartment doors to remain slightly open
Search for traces of animals that have gained entry
Disconnect the flat screen from the mains and, if necessary, remove it from the vehicle

Gas system

Close regulator tap on the gas bottle
Close all gas isolator taps
Always remove gas bottles from the gas bottle compartment, even if they are empty

Electrical system

Fully charge living area and starter battery Charge the battery for at least 20 hours before laying up.
Disconnect the living area battery from the 12 V power supply on the panel

Water system

Empty the entire water system. Blow out the residual water from the water pipes (0.5 bar max.). Leave the water taps on in central position. Leave the safety/drainage valve (if there is one) and all drain cocks open. Observe the notes in chapter 11

12.7.2 Winter lay-up

Additional measures are required if laying up the vehicle over winter:

Base vehicle

Activities Done
Clean body and underbody thoroughly and spray with hot wax or protect with varnish
Fill fuel tank with winter diesel
Check antifreeze in the cooling water
Rectify damage to the paintwork

Body

Keep the forced ventilation open
Clean and lubricate the mounted steady legs
Clean and grease all door and flap hinges
Brush oil or glycerine on all locking mechanisms
Rub all rubber seals with talc
Use graphite dust to treat locking cylinders

Interior

Position de-humidifiers
Remove upholstery from the vehicle and store in a dry place
Air the interior every 3 weeks
Empty all cabinets and storage compartments, open flaps, doors and drawers
Thoroughly clean the interior
If there is a risk of frost, do not leave the flat screen in the vehicle

Electrical system

Remove starter and living area batteries and store in a place protected from frost (see chapter 9)

Water system

Clean the water system using a cleaning agent from a specialised store

Complete vehicle

Arrange the tarpaulins in such a way that the ventilation openings are not covered, or use porous tarpaulins

12.7.3 Starting up the vehicle after a temporary lay-up or after lay-up over winter

Go through the following checklist before start-up:

Base vehicleActivities Done
Check the tyre pressure on all tyres
Check the tyre pressure of the spare wheel
BodyClean the pivot bearing of the entrance step
Check the functioning of the fitted steady legs
Check that the doors, windows and skylights are working properly
Check the function of all external locks
Remove the cover from the waste gas vent of the heater (if there is one)
Remove the winter cover from the refrigerator grills (if there is one)
Gas systemPut the gas bottles in the gas bottle compartment, tie down and connect to the gas pressure regulator
Electrical systemConnect to 240 V power supply using the external socket
Fully charge living area and starter battery
Charge the battery for at least 20 hours after lay-up.
Connect the living area battery with the 12 V power supply via the panel
Check that the electrical system are working, e.g. interior light, socket and all installed electrical appliances
Water systemDisinfect water pipes and water tank
Check the functionality of the operating lever for the waste water tank
Close all drain cocks and water taps
Check the water taps, drain cocks and water distributors for leaks
AppliancesCheck the function of the refrigerator
Change heating fluid of the hot-water heater every 2 years
Check the function of the heater/boiler
Check the function of the gas cooker
Check the function of the air conditioning unit

Chapter overview

This chapter contains instructions about inspection and maintenance work concerning the vehicle.

The maintenance instructions address the following topics:

• electrical-hydraulic steady legs
• Alde hot-water heater
• independent vehicle heater
• air conditioning unit
• vacuum cleaner
● replacing bulbs and fluorescent tubes

At the end of the chapter you will find important instructions on how to obtain spare parts.

13.1 Inspection work

Like any technical appliance, the vehicle must be inspected at regular intervals.

This inspection work must be carried out by qualified personnel.

Special technical knowledge, which cannot be taught within the framework of this instruction manual, is required for these tasks. Personnel with this technical knowledge are available for assistance at all authorised dealers and service centres. Their experience and regular technical instruction by the factory as well as equipment and tools guarantee expert and up-to-date inspection of the vehicle.

The service centre in charge will confirm the work performed.

Have chassis inspections confirmed in the chassis manufacturer's customer service booklet.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Inspection work - 1

Observe the inspections indicated by the manufacturer and have them carried out at the specified intervals. The value of the vehicle is thus preserved.
The confirmation of the inspection work carried out serves as valid proof in the event of damage and guarantee claims.

13.2 Maintenance work

As with every machine, this vehicle requires maintenance. The extent and frequency of the maintenance work required depend on conditions of operation and use. More difficult operating conditions make it necessary to service the vehicle more often.

Have the base vehicle and the appliances serviced at the intervals specified in the corresponding instruction manuals.

13.3 Electrical-hydraulic steady legs

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Electrical-hydraulic steady legs - 1

Have the oil changed every 3 years by your authorised dealer or the service centre.
If oil needs to be topped up, use only oils specified by the manufacturer. Refer to the manufacturer's separate instruction manual for information, or ask your authorised dealer or the service centre.

Check the system's oil level at least once per month with the steady legs fully retracted.

The filling level must be approximately two to four centimetres below the filler opening.

13.4 Alde hot-water heater

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Alde hot-water heater - 1

▷ Check the level of the heating fluid regularly on the compensator reservoir.
During or after the first operating hours of the hot-water heater, the filling level may fall below the minimum mark. If this is the case, top up the heating fluid.
We recommend to bleed the heating system after the initial heater operation and to check the glycol content.
Have heating fluid changed by an authorised dealer or a service centre at intervals of approximately two years as corrosion-protection wears off after some time.
Top up heating system with a water-glycol mixture (60 : 40) only. This mixture offers frost protection up to approx. -25 °C. When topping up hot-water heaters that are connected to the engine's cooling circuit, please observe the instructions in the instruction manuals of the manufacturers.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Alde hot-water heater - 2

▶ Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.

13.4.1 Checking the fluid level

1 2 3 DEFO0068

Fig. 174 Compensator reservoir hot-water heater

■ Switch off the hot-water heater and allow it to cool down.
■ Check if the fluid level is between the marks "MIN" (Fig. 174,3) and "MAX" (Fig. 174,2) on the compensator reservoir (Fig. 174).

13.4.2 Topping up heating fluid

■ Position the vehicle horizontally. This prevents the formation of bubbles.
■ Switch off the hot-water heater and allow it to cool down.
■ Unscrew or pull off the panel.
■ Open the rotary lid (Fig. 174,1) on the compensator reservoir.
■ Slowly remove cover with circulating pump upwards.
- Check anti-freeze with an anti-freeze hydrometer. The frost protection content must be 40 % or correspond to a frost protection of -25 °C.
■ Fill water frost protection mixture slowly into the compensator reservoir.

The optimum fluid level is reached when the fluid in the compensator reservoir is 1 cm above the "MIN" mark.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Topping up heating fluid - 1

13.4.3 Bleeding the heating system

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Bleeding the heating system - 1

natural_image Close-up of a mechanical pipe fitting with a textured central component and a labeled pin (1), no visible text or symbols beyond the number.

Fig. 175 Bleeding valve of hot-water heater

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Bleeding the heating system - 2

natural_image Close-up of a metallic mechanical component with a labeled dimension line (1), no readable text or symbols present.

Fig. 176 Cover in the dashboard

The bleeding valves are built in nearby the radiators. Depending on the model, the bleeding valve may be concealed under a cover (Fig. 176,1) in the dashboard.

■ Switch off the hot-water heater and allow it to cool down.
■ Open bleeding valve (Fig. 175,1) and leave open until no more air escapes.
■ Close bleeding valve.
■ Repeat this procedure at all bleeding valves.
■ Check to see if the hot-water heater warms up.

13.5 Independent vehicle heater

Use the independent vehicle heater for 10 minutes at least once a month with a cold engine and smallest fan settings.

Before the heating season starts, have the independent vehicle heater checked by an authorised specialist workshop.

13.6 Air conditioning unit (Truma)

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Air conditioning unit (Truma) - 1

▶ Prior to carrying out work on the device, turn off the power supply.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Air conditioning unit (Truma) - 2

▷ Never operate the air conditioning unit without a lint filter. Without a lint filter, the vaporiser becomes dirty and the capacity of the air conditioning unit is consequently impaired.
Condensation can enter the vehicle if the condensation drain is clogged up. Keep the condensation drain free from dirt, leaves and similar.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Air conditioning unit (Truma) - 3

natural_image Interior view of a room with horizontal slatted panels and metal fixtures (no visible text or symbols)

Fig. 177 Air conditioning unit

The air conditioning unit is installed in the double floor on the right side of the vehicle. The lint filter can be accessed via a flap in the rear garage.

A lint filter (Fig. 177,1) for the air circulation suction system is at the front of the air conditioning unit. The lint filter must be cleaned at regular intervals, at least twice a year however, and replaced if necessary.

The condensation drain is under the floor of the vehicle. Keep the drain hose free from dirt, leaves or similar to allow the condensation to be drained.

13.7 Central vacuum cleaner

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Central vacuum cleaner - 1

▶ Prior to carrying out work on the device, turn off the power supply.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Central vacuum cleaner - 2

▷ Never operate the vacuum cleaner without a filter. Dirt can enter the motor and impair its performance.

1 2 3 4 DE T00620

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Central vacuum cleaner - 4

natural_image Technical line drawing of a device component with a labeled arrow pointing to a feature (no text or symbols present)

Fig. 178 Vacuum cleaner Fig. 179 Blow-out filter

Changing the motor filter:

■ Press the unlocking device (Fig. 178,1) upwards.
■ Open the flap (Fig. 178,2).
■ Carefully remove the dust bag.
■ Reach into the vacuum cleaner and pull out the motor filter (Fig. 178,3).

Changing the blow-out filter:

■ Insert a new motor filter or wash out the motor filter manually, allow it to dry and put it back in.
■ Align the motor filter. The sides of the motor filter must be underneath the vertical ribs all round.
■ Insert the dust bag.
■ Close flap.
■ Reach into the centre of the blow-out opening (Fig. 178,4).
■ Pull out the blow-out filter (Fig. 179,1).
■ Push the new blow-out filter outwards to the left from the centre, and then push it to the right (Fig. 179).

13.8 Replacing bulbs and fluorescent tubes

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Replacing bulbs and fluorescent tubes - 1

▶ Bulbs and light fittings can be extremely hot. Therefore, allow lights to cool down before changing bulbs.
▶ Shut off the power supply on the safety cut-out in the 240 V fuse box before changing bulbs.
▶ Store bulbs in a safe place inaccessible to children.
▶ Do not use any bulb that has been dropped or which shows scratches in its glass. The bulb might burst.
▶ Lights can get very hot. When the light is switched on, there must always be a safety distance of 30 cm between light and flammable objects. Fire hazard!

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Replacing bulbs and fluorescent tubes - 2

A new bulb should not be touched with the fingers. Use a cloth when installing the new bulb.
▶ Only use bulbs of the same type and with the correct wattage.
▷ If LEDs in lights are defect, contact an authorised dealer or service centre.

13.8.1 Halogen spotlight (movable)

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Halogen spotlight (movable) - 1

natural_image Close-up of a mechanical component with numbered parts (1 and 2) and a label 'DE T00370' visible, no readable text or symbols beyond labels.

Fig. 180 Halogen spotlight (movable)

Changing bulbs:

■ Loosen the fixing screws (Fig. 180,1).
■ Carefully remove the lamp chalice (Fig. 180,2) from the holder.
■ Remove halogen bulb.
■ Put in a new halogen bulb.
■ Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.

13.8.2 Room lamp

1 2 3 DET00072

Fig. 181 Room lamp

Changing bulbs:

■ Unscrew the cap (Fig. 181,1).
■ Remove cover (Fig. 181,2).
■ Press the light covering (Fig. 181,3) lightly together and remove it.
■ Remove the fluorescent tube.
■ Insert a new fluorescent tube.
■ Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.

13.8.3 Recessed halogen light with housing

1 2 3 DET00495

Fig. 182 Recessed halogen light

The recessed halogen light is installed flush in a housing (Fig. 182,1).

Changing bulbs:

■ Use a screwdriver to remove the inner cover ring (Fig. 182,3) from the housing.
■ Remove the cover ring with the glass.
■ Remove halogen bulb (Fig. 182,2).
■ Put in a new halogen bulb.
■ Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.

13.8.4 Recessed halogen light (swivelling)

1 2 3 DET00073

Fig. 183 Recessed halogen light (swiv-elling)

Changing bulbs:

■ Use a suitable tool (e.g. a screwdriver) to lever out and remove the lamp (Fig. 183,1).
■ Take the spotlight (Fig. 183,2) out of the lamp.
■ Remove cover (Fig. 183,3).
■ Remove halogen bulb.
■ Put in a new halogen bulb.
■ Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.

13.8.5 Recessed halogen light (flat)

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Recessed halogen light (flat) - 1

natural_image Circular mechanical component with concentric rings and a labeled section '1', no text or symbols present.

Technical diagram showing three-step assembly of a mechanical component with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating motion.

Fig. 184 Recessed halogen light (flat) Fig. 185 Changing the halogen bulb

The recessed halogen light (Fig. 184,1) is installed flush.

Changing bulbs:

■ Use a screwdriver to remove the inner cover ring (Fig. 185,1) from the housing.
■ Use a screwdriver to remove the cover ring with the glass (Fig. 185,2) from the lower section of the recessed halogen light.
■ Remove halogen bulb (Fig. 185,3).
■ Put in a new halogen bulb.
■ Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.

13.8.6 Wardrobe light

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Wardrobe light - 1

natural_image Close-up of a mechanical component with a labeled part (1) and identifier DET00332, no readable text or symbols beyond the label.

Fig. 186 Wardrobe light

Changing bulbs:

■ Press the light covering (Fig. 186,1) lightly together and remove it.
■ Remove halogen bulb.
■ Put in a new halogen bulb.
■ Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.

13.8.7 Garage light

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Garage light - 1

natural_image Close-up of a transparent cylindrical device with a labeled component (no visible text or symbols on the body)

Fig. 187 Garage light

Changing bulbs:

■ Push the light covering (Fig. 187,1) up slightly and remove it.
■ Remove bulb.
■ Put in a new bulb.
■ Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.

13.8.8 Refrigerator light

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Refrigerator light - 1

natural_image Close-up of a Swissmann industrial device with visible wiring and components (no readable text or symbols)

Fig. 188 Refrigerator light

Changing bulbs:

■ Switch off the refrigerator at the external switch.
■ Grip under the light covering (Fig. 188,1) from behind and raise the light covering approximately 3 mm.
■ Remove the light covering to the side.
■ Remove bulb.
■ Put in a new bulb.
■ Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.

13.9 Spare parts

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Spare parts - 1

▶ Every alteration of the original condition of the vehicle can alter road behaviour and jeopardize road safety.
The special equipment and original spare parts recommended by Dethleffs have been specially developed and supplied for your vehicle. These products are available at the authorised dealers or service centres. The authorised dealers and service centres are informed about admissible technical details and carry out the required work correctly.
The use of accessories, parts and fittings not supplied by Dethleffs may cause damage to the vehicle and jeopardize road safety. Even if an expert's report, a general type approval or a design certification exists, there is no guarantee for the proper quality of the product.
▶ No liability can be assumed for damage caused by products which have not been released by Dethleffs. This also applies to impermissible alterations to the vehicle.

For safety reasons, spare parts for pieces of equipment must correspond with manufacturer's instructions and be permitted by the manufacturer as a spare part. These spare parts may only be fitted by the manufacturer or an authorised specialist workshop. The authorised dealers and service centres are available for any spare parts requirement.

Here are some suggestions of important spare parts:

  • Fuses
    • V-belt
    ● Windscreen blades
  • Bulbs

When ordering spare parts, please indicate the serial number and the vehicle type to the authorised dealer or service centre.

The vehicle described in this instruction manual is built and equipped to factory standards. Special equipment is offered depending on its purpose or use.

When fitting special equipment check if such equipment has to be entered in the vehicle documents. Observe the max. permissible gross weight. The authorised dealer or service centre will be happy to advise you.

13.10 Vehicle identification plate

1 2 3 4 5 TYP DE HL FI S mbH & Co. KG STUFE KG KG 1 - 2 - 3 - DET00407

Fig. 189 Vehicle identification plate

1 Type
2 Maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle with trailer
3 Manufacturer of the unit (add-on unit)
4 Manufacturer's code and chassis number
5 EG type approval number
6 Permissible rear axle load (for tandem axle)
7 Permissible axle load rear
8 Permissible axle load front
9 Maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle
10 Serial number

The vehicle identification plate (Fig. 189) with the serial number is fitted on the B column on the front passenger side (models T and A) or in the entrance area (models I).

Do not remove the vehicle identification plate. The vehicle identification plate:

  • Identifies the vehicle
    ● Helps with the procurement of spare parts
    ● Together with the vehicle documents identifies the vehicle owner

Always include the serial number with all inquiries for the customer service office.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Vehicle identification plate - 2

13.11 Warning and information stickers

There are warning and information stickers on and inside the vehicle. Warning and information stickers are for the sake of safety and must not be removed.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Warning and information stickers - 1

Replacement stickers can be obtained from an authorised dealer or a service centre.

Chapter overview

This chapter contains instructions regarding the tyres of the vehicle.

The instructions address the following topics:

  • tyre selection
  • handling of tyres
  • changing wheels
  • spare wheel support
  • tyre pressure

At the end of the chapter there is a table you can use to find the correct tyre pressure for your vehicle.

14.1 General

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - General - 1

▶ Check tyre pressure before a journey or every 2 weeks. Wrong tyre pressure causes excessive wear and can lead to damage or even to tyre burst. You can lose control of the vehicle.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - General - 2

▶ Only check the tyre pressure on cold tyres.
▶ Tubeless tyres have been installed on the vehicle. Never install tubes in these tyres.
Read the instruction manual for the base vehicle.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - General - 3

▷ Depending on the base vehicle and model the vehicles are equipped with only one tyre repair kit as standard.
In the case of a puncture, pull over to the side of the road. Make vehicle safe with a hazard warning triangle. Switch on the warning lights.
▶ Tyres on vehicles with tandem axles may wear faster.
- Tyres must not be older than 6 years as the material will become brittle over time. The four-digit DOT number on the tyre flank indicates the date of manufacture. The first two digits designate the week, the last two digits the year of manufacture.

Example: Week 15, year of manufacture 2009.

Observe:

  • Check the tyres regularly (every 2 weeks) for equal tread wear, tread depth and external damage.
    ■ Replace tyres at the latest, when the minimum depth of tread stipulated by law is reached.
    ■ Always use tyres of the same model, same brand and same style (summer and winter tyres).
    ■ Only use tyres approved for the wheel rim type fitted. The permitted rim and tyre sizes are quoted in the vehicle documents and the authorised dealer or service centre will always be glad to give you advice.
    ■ Run-in new tyres for approx. 100 km (60 miles) at low speed since only then do they reach full strength.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Observe: - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Hexagon"] --> B["Hexagon"]
    B --> C["Hexagon"]
    C --> D["Hexagon"]
    D --> E["Hexagon"]
    E --> F["Hexagon"]
    F --> G["Hexagon"]
    G --> H["Hexagon"]
    H --> I["Hexagon"]
    I --> J["Hexagon"]
    J --> K["Hexagon"]
    K --> L["Hexagon"]
    L --> M["Hexagon"]
    M --> N["Hexagon"]
    N --> O["Hexagon"]
    O --> P["Hexagon"]
    P --> Q["Hexagon"]
    Q --> R["Hexagon"]
    R --> S["Hexagon"]
    S --> T["Hexagon"]
    T --> U["Hexagon"]
    U --> V["Hexagon"]
    V --> W["Hexagon"]
    W --> X["Hexagon"]
    X --> Y["Hexagon"]
    Y --> Z["Hexagon"]

Fig. 190 Tighten the wheel nuts or wheel bolts cross-wise

  • Check regularly that the wheel nuts or wheel bolts are firmly seated. Retighten the wheel nuts or wheel bolts of a changed wheel cross-wise (Fig. 190) after 50 km (30 miles).
    ■ When using new or newly painted rims, re-tighten the wheel nuts or wheel bolts once again after approx. 1,000 to 5,000 km (600 miles to 3,000 miles).
    ■ For lay-ups or long periods of inactivity, keep the tyres and tyre bearings free from pressure points:
    Jack up the vehicle so that the wheels do not bear any load, or move the vehicle every 4 weeks in such a way that the position of the wheels is changed.

14.2 Tyre selection

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Tyre selection - 1

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Tyre selection - 2

▶ A wrong tyre can damage the tyres during the journey and even cause it to burst.

▷ If tyres that are not approved for the vehicle are used, then the type approval for the vehicle and subsequently the insurance coverage can lapse. The authorised dealer or service centre will be happy to advise you.

The tyre sizes approved for the vehicle are given in the vehicle documents or can be obtained from the authorised dealers or service centres. Each tyre must fit the vehicle on which it will be driven. This applies to the external dimensions (diameter, width), which are indicated with the standardised size designations. In addition, the tyres must meet the requirements of the vehicle with regard to weight and speed.

Weight refers to the maximum permissible axle load which can be distributed on two tyres. The maximum load-carrying capacity of a tyre is indicated by its load index (= LI, load index code).

The axle geometry of a vehicle, such as wheel camber and track, is also important for tyre selection. The maximum permissible speed for a tyre (with full load-carrying capacity) is indicated by the speed index (= SI). Together, load index and speed index form the operating code of a tyre. This is an official component of the complete, standardised dimensions description which appears on every tyre. The information on the tyres must correspond to the specifications which appear in the vehicle papers.

14.3 Tyre specifications

215/70 R 15C 109/107 Q

Description Explanation
215 Tyre width in mm
70 Height-to-width proportion in percent
R Tyre design (R = radial)
15 Rim diameter in inches
C Commercial (transporter)
109 Load index code for single tyres
107 Load index code for twin tyres
Q Speed index (Q = 160 km/h)

14.4 Handling of tyres

■ Drive over kerbs at an obtuse angle. Otherwise the flanks of the tyres may get pinched. Driving over a kerb at a sharp angle can damage the tyre and result in it getting ruptured.
■ Drive over high manhole covers at a slow speed. Otherwise the tyres may get pinched. Driving over a high manhole cover at high speed can damage the tyre and result in it getting ruptured.
■ Check the shock absorbers regularly. Driving with poor shock absorbers significantly increases wear.
If the tread wear is uneven, have the toe-in and the wheel camber checked. Driving with an incorrectly set toe-in or a one-sided wheel camber leads to a significant increase in wear.
■ Avoid block brakings. Block braking gives the tyres "brake plates" of varying strength. This reduces driving comfort. It might even make the tyres unserviceable.
■ Do not clean the tyres with a high-pressure cleaner. The tyres can suffer serious damage within just a few seconds and rupture as a result.
■ Drive in such a way as to protect your tyres. Avoid braking sharply, revving up too strongly and long journeys on poor roads.

14.5 Changing wheels

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Changing wheels - 1

The vehicle must be on level, firm ground, secure from slipping.
▶ Go into first gear. In the case of automatic transmission, change gear to "P" position.
▶ Before jacking up the vehicle firmly apply the handbrake.
▶ Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by blocking the opposite wheel with the wheel chocks.
▶ Under no circumstances jack the vehicle with the fitted supports.
▶ If a trailer is connected: Detach the trailer before lifting the vehicle.
▶ Position the vehicle jack underneath the axle, not under any circumstances on the bodywork.
▶ Never overload the vehicle jack. The maximum permissible load is specified on the vehicle jack's identification plate.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Changing wheels - 2

▶ Use the vehicle jack only for lifting the vehicle briefly while changing the tyre.
▶ Do not start the motor while the vehicle is jacked up.
▶ Whilst the vehicle is in a jacked up position, persons must not lie down under it.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Changing wheels - 3

Do not damage the thread of the thread bolts when changing the wheel.
▷ Tighten the wheel nuts or wheel bolts cross-wise (Fig. 190).
When changing wheels (e.g. alloy wheel rims or wheels with winter tyres), use the correct wheel bolts of the correct length and shape. The firm seating of the wheels and the function of the braking system depend on this.
▶ Wheel rims and tyres not permitted for use with the vehicle can jeopardize road safety.
Do not replace wheels cross-wise.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Changing wheels - 4

▷ Protect the vehicle according to the national regulations, e.g. with a hazard warning triangle.
Before changing the wheel, check the wheel rim and tyre size, the max. tyre load and the speed index on the tyres. Only use the wheel rim and tyre sizes stated in the vehicle documents.
▶ Further information can be found in the instruction manual of the base vehicle.

14.6 Spare wheel support

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Spare wheel support - 1

▶ Due to its weight and fitted position, the spare wheel can be raised or lowered by a very strong person only. Always get a second person to assist.

1 2 3 4 5 BLUE00373

Fig. 191 Spare wheel support (Iveco)

Removing the spare wheel:

■ Pull out splint (Fig. 191,4).
■ Press the clip (Fig. 191,5) against the spare wheel and unhook the holder (Fig. 191,3).
■ Move the clip down.
■ Undo nut (Fig. 191,2) and remove the spare wheel (Fig. 191,1).

14.7 Tyre pressure

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Tyre pressure - 1

▶ Tyres overheat if the tyre pressure is too low. This can cause serious tyre damage.

▶ Check tyre pressure before a journey or every 2 weeks. Wrong tyre pressure causes excessive wear and can lead to damage or even to tyre burst. You can lose control of the vehicle.

▶ Use only valves that are approved for the specified tyre pressure.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Tyre pressure - 2

▶ Only check the tyre pressure on cold tyres.

The payload and the durability of tyres is directly dependent on the tyre pressure. Air is a volatile medium. It is unavoidable that it will escape from tyres.

As a rule of thumb it can be assumed that a filled tyre loses pressure at a rate of 0.1 bar every two months. To prevent the tyres becoming damaged or burst, check the tyre pressure regularly.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Tyre pressure - 3

The information on pressure levels is valid for cold tyres and loaded vehicles.
Pressure in hot tyres is higher than in cold tyres. Therefore, check the pressure when the tyres are cold.
The kg values refer to the actual axle load.
▷ Tyre pressures in bar.
The valve used must be approved for the air pressure. We recommend the use of a metal valve for pressures greater than 4.75 bar.
For the maximum permissible axle loads for your vehicle please refer to specific documentation.

Tyre pres-sure225/75 R 16 C118/116 Q225/75 R 16 C121/120 Q
Front (kg) Rear (kg) Front (kg) Rear (kg)
3.0 1680 3190 --
3.25 1790 3400 --
3.5 1900 3610 --
3.75 2010 3820 2060 3970
4.0 2120 4020 2160 4180
4.25 2220 4220 2270 4390
4.5 2330 4410 2380 4600
4.75 2430 4610 2480 4800
5.0 2530 4800 2590 5000
5.25 2640 5000 2690 5200
5.5--27905400
5.75--29005600

The vehicles are constantly brought up to the newest technical standards. It is possible that new tyre sizes are not yet included in this table. If this is the case, the Dethleffs dealer will be happy to provide the newest values.

Chapter overview

This chapter contains instructions about possible faults in your vehicle.

The faults are listed with their possible causes and corresponding remedies.

The instructions address the following topics:

- braking system

- pneumatic spring

• electrical-hydraulic steady legs

- electrical system

- light control

- gas system

- gas cooker

- gas oven

- microwave oven

- heater

- boiler

- refrigerator

• air conditioning unit

- dishwasher

- water supply

- toilet

body

The specified faults can be remedied with relative ease and without a great deal of specialised knowledge. In the event that the remedies detailed in this instruction manual should not be successful, an authorised specialist workshop must find and eliminate the cause of the fault.

15.1 Braking system

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Braking system - 1

▶ Have defects on the braking system immediately remedied by an authorised specialist workshop.

15.2 Pneumatic spring

15.2.1 Pneumatic spring (Goldschmidt)

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Pneumatic spring (Goldschmidt) - 1

▶ Have defects on the air suspension immediately remedied by an authorised specialist workshop.

If one or both air circuits are without air pressure (air cushion or pressure gauge damaged), only undertake the journey at a steady speed (max. 30 km/h) and only to the next garage (emergency running).

Fault Cause Remedy
Compressor does not startFuse is defective Replace fuse
Compressor motor over-heatedAllow compressor motor to cool down for approx. 30 minutes
Operating switch defectiveContact customer service
Thermal monitoring continuously respondsAmbient temperature is too highProvide more ventilation
Compressor is defectiveContact customer service
Loud noises during operationScrewed connections of the supports looseCheck the screwed connections and tighten if necessary
Compressor is defectiveContact customer service
Pressure drops sharply during operationConnections loose Tightenconnections
System has a leak Contactcustomer service
Compressor does not switch offConnections loose Tightenconnections
Compressor is defectiveContact customer service
Operating switch defectiveContact customer service

15.2.2 Pneumatic spring (VB-air suspension)

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Pneumatic spring (VB-air suspension) - 1

▶ Have defects on the air suspension immediately remedied by an authorised specialist workshop.

Fault Cause Remedy
Compressor not running Fuseuse is defective Replace fuse
Input voltage too low Charge batterythe living area battery
Vehicle is not lowered Fuseis defective Replace fuse
Vehicle is not raised, even though the compressor is runningNo changeover between manual and automatic level controlCheck the functionWhen the service function is activated ("SERVICE" LED lights up):Deactivate the service functionWhen the service function is not activated: Contact customer service

15.3 Electrical-hydraulic steady legs

Fault Cause Remedy
System does not workIgnition not switched onSwitch on ignition
Handbrake not applied Apply the handbrake
Control unit switched off Press the On/Off switch
Steady legs do not extendInput voltage too low Charge the living area battery
LED indicator for battery lights up
Steady legs do not extend completely, even though the pump is runningOil level too low Check the oil level and top up oil if necessary

15.4 Electrical system

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Electrical system - 1

When the living area battery is changed, only use batteries of the same type.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Electrical system - 2

▷ See chapter 9 for changing the fuses.

Fault Cause Remedy
Road light system does no longer work correctlyBulb is defective Unscrewcover of the relevant light, replace bulb. Note volts and watts specifications
Fuse is defective Replace fuse
Interior lighting does not workBulb is defective Unscrewcover of the relevant light, replace bulb. Note volts and watts specifications
Fuse on the transformer/rectifier is defectiveReplace fuse on the transformer/rectifier
The electrically operated entrance step cannot be moved in or outFuse on the transformer/rectifier is defectiveReplace fuse on the transformer/rectifier
No 240 V power supply despite connection240 V automatic circuit breaker has triggeredSwitch on the 240 V automatic circuit breaker
Starter or living area battery is not charged when operated in 240 V modeFuse on the starter battery or on the living area battery faultyReplace fuse on the starter battery or on the living area battery
Charger module in the transformer/rectifier or the auxiliary charging unit is defectiveContact customer service
Living area battery is not charged during vehicle operationFuse on terminal D+ of the alternator is defectiveReplace fuse
Disconnector relay in the transformer/rectifier is defectiveContact customer service
No display on the panel 12V power supply switched offSwitch 12 V power sup-ply on
Living area battery dis-connected from the 12 V power supplyConnect the living area battery with the 12 V power supply
Starter or living area bat-tery is not chargedCharge the starter or liv-ing area battery
Disconnector relay in the transformer/rectifier is defectiveContact customer service
Flat fuse (2 A) in the liv-ing area battery is defec-tiveReplace flat fuse (2 A) in the living area battery
12 V power supply does not work12 V power supply switched offSwitch 12 V power sup-ply on
Living area battery dis-connected from the 12 V power supplyConnect the living area battery with the 12 V power supply
Living area battery is dis-chargedCharging the living area battery
Fuse on the living area battery is defectiveReplace fuse on the liv-ing area battery
Disconnector relay in the transformer/rectifier is defectiveContact customer service
12 V power supply does not work in 240 V opera-tion12 V power supply switched offSwitch 12 V power sup-ply on
Living area battery dis-connected from the 12 V power supplyConnect the living area battery with the 12 V power supply
Charger module in the transformer/rectifier or the auxiliary charging unit is defectiveContact customer service
240 V automatic circuit breaker has triggeredContact customer service
Fuse on the living area battery is defectiveReplace fuse on the liv-ing area battery
Starter battery is dis-charged in 12 V opera-tionDisconnector relay in the transformer/rectifier is defectiveContact customer service
Living area battery dis-connected from the 12 V power supplyConnect the living area battery with the 12 V power supply
No voltage is supplied by the living area batteryLiving area battery is dischargedCharge living area battery immediatelyTotal discharge damages the battery.If the vehicle is to be laid up for a long period, fully charge the living area battery beforehand
No output voltage at the converter ("Power Status" LED shows a fault)Input voltage too high (rapid flashing)Check input voltage
Input voltage too low (slow flashing)Recharge battery
Check cables and connections
Thermal overload (periodical flashing)Switch off converter and appliances, and switch back on again after approx. 5 to 10 minutes
Improve ventilation
Short circuit, incorrect polarity or excessive continuous load (continuous lighting)Switch off the converter and remove the appliance. If no fault occurs after switching back on without an appliance, it is the appliance that is defective. If the fault still occurs, contact customer service
Extractor hood does not work240 V automatic circuit breaker is switched offSwitch on the 240 V automatic circuit breaker
Fuse on the transformer/ rectifier is defectiveReplace fuse
Extractor hood defective CContact customer service
Air conditioning unit cannot be switched on or off240 V automatic circuit breaker has triggeredSwitch on the 240 V automatic circuit breaker
Remote control battery is emptyChange remote control battery

15.5 Light control

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Light control - 1

In most cases, a fault in the light control is due to defective lights or fuses. Before checking the light control for faults, check the fuses and bulbs.

Fault Cause Remedy
None of the lamps can be operatedNo supply voltage Check vvoltage supply fuses
Check power cables for cable break
Check the connections on the control unit and on the power supply
Control unit defective Contact customer service
Single lamp cannot be operatedBulb is defective Replace bulb
Cable to the lamp defec-tiveCheck cable for short cir-cuits or breaks
Inspect the connections
No supply voltage in the corresponding circuitCheck voltage supply fuse in the corresponding circuit
Check power cable in the corresponding circuit
Check the connections on the control unit and on the power supply
Switch does not workCable defectiveCheck cable for short cir-cuits or breaks
Check the connections on the switch and on the control unit
Switch faulty Contact customer service

15.6 Gas system

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Gas system - 1

In case of a defect of the gas system (gas odour, high gas consumption) there is danger of explosion! Close regulator tap on the gas bottle immediately. Open doors and windows and ventilate well.
If the gas system is defective: Do not smoke; do not ignite any open flames, and do not operate electric switches (light switches etc.).
▶ Have the defective gas system repaired by an authorised specialist workshop.

Fault Cause Remedy
No gas Gas bottle is emptyChange gas bottle
Gas isolator tap closed Open the gas isolator tap
Regulator tap on the gas bottle is closedOpen regulator tap on the gas bottle
External temperature is too low (-42 °C for propane gas, 0 °C for butane gas)Wait for higher external temperatures
Built-in appliance is defectiveContact customer service

15.7 Cooker

15.7.1 Gas cooker/gas oven

Fault Cause Remedy
Ignition fuse does not operate (flame does not burn after the control knobs are released)Heat-up time is too short KKeep control knobpressed for approx. 15 to20 seconds after ignition
Ignition fuse is defective CContact customer service
Flame extinguishes when being reduced to its minimum settingThermocouple sensor is incorrectly setCorrectly reset thermocouple sensor (do not bend). The sensor tip should protrude by 5 mm beyond the burner. The sensor neck should not be more than 3 mm away from the burner ring; if necessary, contact customer service

15.7.2 Microwave oven

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Microwave oven - 1

▶ Only qualified personnel may repair the microwave oven. Improper repairs can cause major risks to the user.

Fault Cause Remedy
Microwave oven does not cut inFuse is defective Replace fuse
Door of the microwave oven is not properly closedRemove foreign bodies stuck in the door of the microwave oven and close door properly

15.8 Heater/boiler

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Heater/boiler - 1

▷ If a fault occurs in the system, the cause is shown on the display.

In the event of a defect contact the nearest customer service workshop of the relevant appliance manufacturer. The list of addresses is enclosed with the accompanying appliance documentation. Only authorised qualified personnel may repair the appliance.

Fault Cause Remedy
Heater does not ignite with gas operationLack of gas Open regulatortap and gas isolator tap
Connect a full gas bottle
Heater does not igniteBattery voltage too lowCharge battery. If the battery voltage rises above 11 V, the heater is switched on automatically-ly
Heater does not ignite at 240 V electrical operationNo 240 V power supply Switch on the 240 V automatic circuit breaker
Heater switches off Overheating Allow the heater to cool.
Heater running, but no heat at the convectorsCirculating pump does not workTo reset the display, interrupt the 12 V power supply to the heater and switch it back on again
Switch on room thermostat
Contact customer service
Heater and circulating pump running, but no heat at the convectorsAir in the heating system Bleed hot-water heater

15.9 Refrigerator

In the event of a defect contact the nearest customer service workshop of the relevant appliance manufacturer. The list of addresses is enclosed with the accompanying appliance documentation. Only authorised qualified personnel may repair the appliance

15.9.1 Refrigerator with AES

Fault Cause Remedy
Indicator lamps "230 V", "12 V" or "AUTO" are not lit greenRefrigerator is turned off Sswitch on the refrigerator with energy selector switch
No electrical operating voltageConnect 240 V power supply
Let the vehicle engine run
Switch on or replace the fuse
Contact a specialist workshop
Refrigerator does not switch to 12 V mode during the journeyOperating voltage of alternator is not present/ too lowContact a specialist workshop
Refrigerator does not switch on in gas operation, "GAS" indicator lamp is not lit yellowLack of gas Open regulator tap and gas isolator tap
Connect a full gas bottle
Cobwebs or burnt residue in the burning chamberRemove the ventilation grill on the outside of the vehicle and clean the burning chamber
"GAS" indicator lamp flashes yellow, no gasAir in the gas pipe Switch offthe refrigerator with energy selector switch
Open regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap of the refrigerator
Switch on the refrigerator with energy selector switch. After 10 seconds, the AES will attempt another ignition
If the "GAS" indicator lamp flashes yellow again after approx. 30 seconds, the failure has not been remedied yet
Repeat this process two to three times for ventilation. If the refrigerator cannot be operated, contact customer services

15.9.2 Kissmann refrigerator

Fault Cause Remedy
Refrigerator does not workRefrigerator is turned off Switch on the refrigerator (external and internal switch)
No electrical operating voltageConnect 240 V power supply
Let the vehicle engine run
Check fuse, replace if necessary
Contact a specialist workshop
Interior lighting does not workRefrigerator is turned off Switch on the refrigerator (external and internal switch)
Bulb is defective Changing the bulb
Refrigerator does not refrigerate correctlyTemperature controller set too lowAdjust the temperature controller
Ventilation insufficient Clean the ventilation slots
Operating noises too loudNearby furniture vibrates Check the attachment or straighten the refrigerator

15.10 Air conditioning unit

Fault Cause Remedy
Air conditioning unit does not coolNo 240 V power supply Conconnect 240 V power supply
Fuse is defective Check fuse and replace if necessary
Temperature below 16 °C
Temperature has been set incorrectlyAdjust the temperature
Air filter contaminated Replace air filter

15.11 Dishwasher

Fault Cause Remedy
Dishwasher does not startDishwasher switched off SSwitch on the dishwasher
240 V automatic circuit breaker has triggeredSwitch on the 240 V automatic circuit breaker
240 V operating voltage too lowHave the 240 V power supply checked by an authorised specialist work-shop
Dishwasher door is not shut properlyShut the dishwasher door
Water pump is switched offActivate water pump (see chapter 12)
Fuse for water pump is defectiveReplace fuse on the transformer/rectifier
Button for delayed start is pressed inWait for set time
Dishwasher takes in no water (Program display of the selected washing program flashes. Display shows as error code: 10)No water intake Open water tap
Water is not pumped off at the end of the program (Program display of the selected washing pro-gram flashes. Display shows as error code: 20)Door opened before end of programRestart the program
No water drainage Check the waste water system of the vehicle
Cleaning result poorSpray arm stuckMake the spray arm rotatable
Openings on the spray arm blockedClean the spray arm
Filter blocked Clean the filter
Incorrect cleaning agent dosingAdjust the dosing
Rinsing liquid empty Top up rinsing liquid

15.12 Water supply

Fault Cause Remedy
Leakage water inside the vehicleA leak has occurred Identify leak, re-connect water pipes
No water Water tank is emptyReplenish drinking water
Drain cock not closed Close drain cock
12 V power supply switched offSwitch 12 V power supply on
Fuse of the water pump is defectiveReplace fuse on the transformer/rectifier
Water pump defective Exchange water pump (have it exchanged)
Water pipe snapped off Straighten water pipe or replace
Transformer/rectifier defectiveContact customer service
Water pump switched off on panelSwitch water pump on
Toilet has no flush waterWater tank is emptyReplenish drinking water
Fuse for toilet is defective Replace fuse
Display for water and waste water indicates a wrong valueMeasuring probe in the waste water or water tank is soiledClean water/waste water tank
Measuring probe is defectiveReplace measuring probe
Waste water tank cannot be emptiedDrain cock is clogged Open the cleaning cap on the waste water tank and drain the waste water. Rinse the waste water tank well
Drain on the single lever mixer tap is cloggedPerlator calcified Unclip the perlator, de-calcify in vinegar water (only for products made from metal)
Water jets on the shower nozzle cloggedWater jets calcifiedDe-calcify shower nozzle in vinegar water (only for products made from metal) or rub off soft nozzle burling
Water drains from the shower tray slowly or does not drain at allThe vehicle is not in a horizontal positionPosition the vehicle horizontally
Milkiness of the waterTank filled with dirty waterClean water tank mechanically and chemically; then disinfect and rinse copiously with drinking water
Residues in the water tank or water systemClean water system mechanically and chemically; then disinfect and rinse copiously with drinking water
Any change in the taste or odour of the waterTank filled with dirty waterClean water system mechanically and chemically; then disinfect and rinse copiously with drinking water
Fuel filled into the water tank by mistakeClean water system mechanically and chemically; then disinfect and rinse copiously with drinking water. If not successful: Contact a specialist workshop
Microbiological deposits in the water systemClean water system mechanically and chemically; then disinfect and rinse copiously with drinking water
Deposits in the water tank and/or water-carrying componentsWater excessively long in the water tank and in water-carrying componentsClean water system mechanically and chemically; then disinfect and rinse copiously with drinking water

15.13 Vacuum toilet (Dometic)

Fault Cause Remedy
Water does not remain in toilet bowlSeal dirty or defective Clean seal or have replaced
Water does not flow properly into the toilet bowlWater pressure too low Contact customer service
Water is entering the vehicleHose connection loosenedCheck connections for proper seat and tighten hose clamps
Vacuum pump does not runNo power present Control power supply (or have checked)
Vacuum pump runs too oftenCap or connection not sealed tightlyCheck connections between toilet and vacuum (or have checked)
Toilet clogged Improper usedRemove blockage

15.14 Body

Fault Cause Remedy
Flap hinges/door hinges are difficult to operateFlap/door hinges are not sufficiently lubricatedLubricate flap hinges/door hinges with acid-free and resin-free grease
Hinges/joints in the bathroom unit/toilet compartment are difficult to operate/make a grating noiseHinges/joints are not sufficiently lubricatedLubricate hinges/joints with solvent-free and acid-free grease ▷ Spray cans often contain solvents
Storage compartment hinges are difficult to operate/make a grating noiseStorage compartment hinges are not sufficiently lubricatedLubricate storage compartment hinges with acid-free and resin-free grease
Front bonnet swivel system is difficult to operateFront bonnet swivel system is not (sufficiently) lubricatedLubricate front bonnet swivel system with acid-free and resin-free grease
Heki skylight difficult to operateThreaded spindle not lubricatedLubricate threaded spindle
Threaded spindle defectiveHave threaded spindle replaced

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Body - 1

The authorised dealers and service centres are available for any spare parts requirement.

16.1 Weight details for special equipment

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Weight details for special equipment - 1

The use of accessories, parts and fittings not supplied by Dethleffs may cause damage to the vehicle and jeopardize road safety. Even if an expert's report, a general type approval or a design certification exists, there is no guarantee for the proper quality of the product.
▶ Every alteration of the original condition of the vehicle can alter road behaviour and jeopardize road safety.
▶ No liability can be assumed for damage caused by products which have not been released by Dethleffs. This also applies to impermissible alterations to the vehicle.

Weight details for Dethleffs special equipment are listed in the table below. If these objects are either carried in or on the vehicle and are not part of the standard equipment, they must be taken into consideration when calculating the payload.

All weight details are approximate.

Observe the max. permissible gross weight.

Item designation Surplus weight (kg)
Caravan coupling 26
External shower (cold water) 1
Automatic transmission 5
Car radio and CD 2
Oven 14
Battery 220 Ah „Gel“ battery 25
Skylight 1
Roof rail 10
Roof rack with aluminium ladder 17
"Kissenschlacht" (pillow fight) decoration package 1
Extractor hood2
DuoControl switching facility (incl. 11 kg gas bottle)26
Bike rack for 2 bicycles in rear garage3
Bike rack for 3 bicycles9
Bike rack for 4 bicycles10
Flat screen5
External gas socket1
Holder for flat screen5
Heki 315-22
Insect screen, conversion door3
Insulation mat for driver's cabin window1
Air conditioning unit32
Refrigerator, separate freezer compartment20
Pneumatic spring30
Awning, 450 cm32
Awning, 500 cm 36
Awning, electric, 550 cm 65
Awning, electric, 600 cm 75
Microwave oven 15
Navigation system 2
Crossbeams and ladder for roof rail 7
Radio preparation 1
Reversing camera 5
Satellite unit 15-23
Switch for water pump 1
Service flap 3
Safety kit 15
Solar installation 15
Transformer for air conditioning unit 3
Fabric panelling, inside2
Rear supports (2 pcs.) 6
Thetford spare cassette2
Sill3
Cables for reversing camera3
Awning light1
Hazard warning triangle and first-aid kit2
Winter covering for the refrigerator grating1
Auxiliary battery 95 Ah27
Additional heater, driver's cabin (independent vehicle heater)7
Auxiliary lamps, inside 2
Additional pump 240 V (Alde heater)1

Chapter overview

This chapter contains helpful tips for the journey.

The instructions address the following topics:

• road assistance in European countries
● traffic rules in European countries
• gas supply in European countries
- toll regulations in European countries
● safe ways to spend the night during travel
- camping in winter

At the end of the chapter there is a checklist containing the most important equipment for the journey.

17.1 Traffic rules in foreign countries

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Traffic rules in foreign countries - 1

The vehicle driver is required to inform himself as to the traffic rules of the countries in which he plans to travel before beginning the trip. Contact your automobile club or embassy for further information.
In some European countries, warning vests must be worn when exiting the vehicle outside of towns in the case of vehicle failures or accidents.

Information about traffic regulations is especially important as state law applies in case of damage. For your own safety, always observe the following rules when travelling abroad:

• Take the green insurance card with you.
● Always register accidents with the police.
- Never sign documents that you have not read and understood completely.

17.2 Help on Europe's roads

Country Emergen-+cy services★ PoliceBreakdown service
Belgium 112+★ 112TCB Brussels 0 70 34 47 77
Bulgaria 150+★ 166UAB (02) 9 80 33 08/146 ^1)
Denmark 112+free of charge★ 112free of chargeFalck 79 42 42 42
Germany 112+★ 110ADAC 22 22 22 ^1)
Estonia 112+★ 110/112 ^1) EESTI (0) 6 97 91 88/18 88 ^1)
Finland 112+★ 112Helsinki (09) 77 47 64 00
France+ 15/112 ^1) ★ 17/112 ^1) Lyon (08) 25 80 08 22AIT-Assistance 0800 08 92 22
Greece 112+★ 171/112^1) ELPA 104 00
Great Britain 112+★ 112AA (08 00) 0 28 90 18/(08 00) 82 82 82^1)
Ireland+ 999/112^1) ★ 999/112^1) AA Dublin 18 00 66 77 88
Iceland 112+★ 112F.I.B 5 11 21 12
Italy+ 118/112^1) ★ 112ACI 803 116/8 00 11 68 00^1)
Croatia+ 94/112^1) ★ 92/112^1) HAK 9 87/ 0 19 87^1)
Latvia+ 03/112^1) ★ 02/112^1) LAMB 8 00 00 00
Lithuania+ 03/112^1) ★ 02/112^1) LAS 8 80 00 00 00/18 88^1)
Luxembourg 112+★ 113/112^1) ACL 2 60 00
Macedonia 194+★ 192AMSM 196
Montenegro 94+★ 92AMSCG 9807
Netherlands 112+★ 112ANWB 08 82 69 28 88
Norway 113+★ 112NAF 81 00 05 05
Austria+ 144/112^1) ★ 133/112^1) ÖAMTC 120
Poland+ 999/112^1) ★ 997/112^1) PZM 022 5 32 84 33
Portugal 112+★ 112ACP Lissab. (21) 9 42 91 03ACP Porto (22) 8 34 00 01
Romania+ 961/112^1) ★ 955/112^1) ACR (021) 2 22 22 22/(021) 2 22 15 53^1)
Russia 03+★ 02RAS (4 95) 7 47 66 66
Sweden 112+★ 112M 0 20 91 29 12
Switzerland 144+★ 117/112^1) TCS 1 40/03 18 50 53 11^1)
Serbia 94+★ 92AMSS (011) 19800
Slovakia +155/112^1) ★ 158/112^1) SATC 1 81 24
Slovenia 112+★ 113AMZS (1) 9 87/(003861) 5 30 53 53^1)
Spain 061+★ 112RACE 9 15 93 33 33
Czech Republic +155/112^1) ★ 158/112^1) UAMK CR 12 30
Turkey 112+★ 155/112^1) TTOK (02 12) 2 82 81 40
Ukraine 03+★ 02112 UA (8-032) 2 97 81 12
Hungary +104/112^1) ★ 107/112^1) MAK1 88/(0036-1) 13 45 17 44^1)
Cyprus 112+★ 112AA 02 22 31 31 31

1) In the mobile communication network

Date 03/2007

Specifications without guarantee

17.3 Speed limits and permissible dimensions

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Speed limits and permissible dimensions - 1

▶ Please always observe the speed limits in the individual countries.

For information, the speed limits (in km/h) and permissible dimensions (in m) of the countries visited most:

Country Max. dimensions in metersWidth Lgth.Gross weightIn built-up areasOutside built-up areasMotor-way
Belgium 2.5512 Up to 7.5 tOver 7.5 t50 90/120^1) 120
50 60/90^1) 90
Bulgaria 2.6012 Up to 3.5 tOver 3.5 t5090130
5070100
Denmark 2.5512 Up to 3.5 tOver 3.5 t5080130
507080
Germany 2.5512 Up to 3.5 t3.5 t up to 7.5 t50100 130^3)
5080100
Over 7.5t^2) 508080
Estonia 2.5012 Up to 3.5 tOver 3.5 t5090110
507070
Finland 2.6012 50 80^4) 80^4)
France 2.5512 Up to 3.5 tOver 3.5 t50 90^5)/-80^5)/100^1)5) 130^5)110^5)
50
Greece2.50 12 50 90/110^11) 120
Great Britain2.55 12 48 96/112^1) 112
Ireland2.55 12 50 60/100^1) 120
Iceland2.55 12 50 90^6) -
Italy2.5012Up to 3.5 t50 90/110^1)7) 130^7)
Over 3.5 t5080100
Croatia2.55 12 50 90/110^1) 130
Latvia2.5012Up to 7.5 t50 90/100^11) 110
Over 7.5 t508080
Lithuania2.5012Up to 3.5 t5090110
Over 3.5 t507070
Luxembourg2.55 12Up to 3.5 tOver 3.5 t50 90^8)7) 130^8)7)
50 75^7) 90^7)
Macedonia2.501240/608080
Montenegro2.50 12Up to 3.5 t50 80/100^1) 100
Over 3.5 t508080
Netherlands 2.55^9) 12 Up to 3.5 tOver 3.5 t50 80/100^1) 120
508080
Norway2.5512.40Up to 3.5 t50 80/90^1) 90
Over 3.5 t508080
CountryMax. dimen-sions in me- tersGross weightIn built-up areasOutside built-up areasMotor-way
WidthLgth.
Austria 2.5512 Up to3.5 t50100 130^10)
Over 3.5 t507080
Poland 2.5012 Up to3.5 t50 90/100^1) 130
Over 3.5 t50 70/80^1) 80
Portugal 2.5012 Up to3.5 t50 90/100^11) 120^12)
Over 3.5 t50 80/90^11) 110^12)
Romania 2.5012 Up to3.5 t50 80/90^1) 120
Over 3.5 t50 80/90^1) 110
Russia 2.5012 Up to3.5 t60 90^13) 110^13)
Over 3.5 t6070 90^13)
Sweden 2.60 24^14) Up to 3.5 t50 70-110^1)^11) 110
Over 3.5 t50 80/90^1) 90
Switzer-land2.55 12Up to 3.5 t50 80/100^1) 120
Over 3.5t^15) 50 80/100^1) 100
Serbia and Mon- tenegro2.50 12Up to 3.5 t60 80/100^1) 100
Over 3.5 t608080
Slovakia 2.5012 Up to3.5 t6090130
Over 3.5 t608080
Slovenia 2.5512 Up to3.5 t50 80/100^1) 100
Over 3.5 t508080
Spain 2.5512 50 70/80^1) 90
Czech Re- public2.50 12Up to 3.5 t5090130
Over 3.5 t508080
Turkey 2.5010 50 8090
Ukraine2.50 1260 90^13) 110^13)
Hungary 2.5012 Up to2.5 t50 90/110^1) 130
Over 2.5 t507080
Cyprus 2.5512 50 80100

1) On expressways, on roads with more than one lane in each direction

2) Vehicles over 7.5 tons max. permissible weight require a tachograph

3) Recommended speed: 130 km/h

4) Since 1995, for the first time, vehicles up to an unladen weight of 1875 kg and vehicles up to 3.5 t perm gross weight with appropriate equipment (ABS, driver airbag, seat belts on all seats) can drive max. 100 km/h

5) On wet roads, reduce speed by 10 km/h, on motorways by 20 km/h

6) On unmade roads (gravel): 80 km/h

7) In wet conditions, reduce speed by 20 km/h

8) Drivers who don't have their driver's licence for the full year, must not drive faster than max. 75 km/h when out of town or 90 km/h on motorways

9) On main roads 2.55 m, on roads marked "B" 2.20 m
10) Between 10 p.m. and 5 a.m. the speed limit on the following motorways is 100 km/h: A10 (Tauernautobahn), A12 (Inntalautobahn), A13 (Brennerautobahn), A14 (Rheintalautobahn)
11) According to traffic signs
^12) Drivers who have had their driver's licence for less than one year must not drive faster than 90 km/h. Corresponding stickers (available from ACP offices) must be affixed in a clearly visible position on the rear of the vehicle
^13) Drivers who have had their driver's licence for less than two years must not drive faster than 70 km/h
^14) Swedish campsites often require the motorhome to have a closed waste water system
^15) A heavy goods vehicle supplement must be paid on all roads for all vehicles exceeding 3.5 tons max. permissible weight

Date 06/2008

Source: ADAC

Specifications without guarantee

17.4 Driving with low beam in European countries

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Driving with low beam in European countries - 1

In many European countries, it is compulsory to drive with the vehicle's lights on even during the day. Regulations vary between countries. Motoring organisations or consulates can provide you with the relevant information.

17.5 Sleeping in the vehicle away from camping areas

Country Sleeping on roads and fieldsYes No Yes NoSleeping on privately owned landsComments
Belgium X X Onhighway rest areasmax. 24 hours permitted
Bulgaria X X
Denmark X X Onstreets and squares only upto 11 hours with a parking disc
Germany X X Staying overnight for one nightto restore driving ability is per- mitted. There may be regional and local limitations
FinlandXXPossible with the permission of the land owner
FranceXXPermission from the local au- thorities or the owner of the land is required. Parking and staying overnight on free areas is pro- hibited
GreeceXXStaying overnight for one night at designated areas on the na- tional route Patras-Athens- Thessaloniki is permitted
Great BritainXX
CountrySleeping on roads and fieldsSleeping on privately owned landsComments
YesNoYesNo
Ireland X X
Italy X X Stayingovernight for one nightat car parks and service stations is allowed. Observe the local regulations. Parking and staying overnight on free areas is prohibited
Croatia X X
Luxembourg X X
Macedonia X X
Netherlands X XOvernight stays on streets andsquares is allowed in some bor-oughs
Norway X X Officially prohibited on rest are-as and cultivated grounds. Trav-elling on dirt roads is prohibited
Austria X X Staying overnight for one nightto restore driving ability is per-mitted, but not in nature re-serves. Observe regional and local restrictions. Generally forbidden in Tyrol
Poland X X Requires property owner's per-mission
PortugalXXStaying overnight for one night on motorway service stations and car parks under 10 hours are tolerated
RomaniaXX
Russia X X
SwedenXXNot on agriculture areas or in the vicinity of houses. Driving on open fields is prohibited
Switzerland X XOne overnight stay at highwayrest areas and in some cantons is tolerated
Serbia and MontenegroXX
SlovakiaXXOvernight stays on private land are only allowed if a toilet is present
SloveniaXX
SpainXXSome regional prohibitions ap-ply, especially on beaches
Czech Repub-licXXOvernight stays on private land are only allowed if a toilet is present
Country Sleepingonroads andfieldsSleeping onprivatelyownedlandsComments
Yes NoYes No
Turkey X X
Ukraine X X
Hungary X X Staying overnight on privatelyowned land is permitted onlywith police certification

Specifications without guarantee

17.6 Gas supply in European countries

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Gas supply in European countries - 1

In Europe, there are several different connection systems for gas bottles. It is not always possible to fill or exchange your gas bottles in a foreign country. Get information about the connection system in the country you are travelling to before embarking on your journey, e.g. at a motoring club or in the trade press.

General tips Always observe the following instructions:

  • Only go on vacation with completely filled gas bottles.
  • Use all of the gas bottles' capacity.
  • Take along adapter sets (available in camping supply stores) for filling gas bottles in foreign countries and for connecting the gas pressure regulator to foreign gas bottles.
  • During the cold time of the year observe filling with propane gas component (butane does not gas below 0 °C).
  • Use blue bottles from the firm Campingaz (distributed world-wide). Only use gas bottles with safety valves.
  • When bottles from other countries are used, check the gas bottle compartments to see if the gas bottles fit into them. Gas bottles from other countries do not always display the same size as your own gas bottles.

17.7 Toll regulations in European countries

Many European countries have introduced a mandatory toll system. The toll regulations and how they are collected vary greatly from country to country. Nevertheless, ignorance is no excuse. Penalties can be quite severe.

As is the case with traffic regulations, the vehicle driver is required to be familiar with the toll formalities before starting out on a trip. For example, in Austria the vignette does not meet the toll requirements for vehicles that weigh more than 3.5 t. There, a so-called "Go-Box" must be obtained and charged. Contact your automobile club or the Internet for further information.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Toll regulations in European countries - 1

▷ Windscreens with solar filters can affect the functioning of automatic toll collection systems (e.g. Go-Box). This must be taken into account when acquiring the appropriate device (e.g. Split-Go-Box).

17.8 Tips on staying overnight safely during travel

Prudent behaviour is the most important protective measure for insuring a safe night in the motorhome.

The risk of thievery is reduced to a minimum when the following basic rules are observed:

  • Before commencing the journey, close and lock all windows, doors and skylights.
  • During high season do not spend the night at highway rest stops or parking areas located along typical vacation routes.
  • Several vehicles on one site at the same time do not necessarily decrease the chances of thievery occurring. Consult your own feelings about the parking site.
    ● Even if it is just for one night, go to a camping site.
  • When parking on open space keep emergency routes clear. The way to the driver's seat should be clear. The ignition key should always be within reach.
  • Only take with you those valuables which are absolutely necessary for the journey. If possible, store valuables in a small safe and not in the immediate vicinity of windows or doors.
    • Always lock up the vehicle.

17.9 Tips for winter campers

The following tips will help make your winter camping experience as agreeable as possible.

  • Reserve your parking place in good time. Good winter camping sites are often booked up early.
  • Do not start your trip without winter tyres.
  • Bring snow chains.
  • Choose your parking place with care. Observe the ground beneath you. Snow and ice may melt.
  • When the vehicle has been positioned, release the handbrake to prevent freezing.
    ● No snow walls should be allowed to cover the built-in forced ventilation.
  • Keep the built-in forced ventilation free from snow and ice.
    ● Make sure the air circulation is good. Good air circulation prevents moisture from collecting and makes it easier to heat the living area.
  • Cover the single-paned driver's cabin window with insulation mats to avoid thermal bridges.
  • Follow the instructions in the section "Gas supply in European countries".
  • Use a two-bottle system with automatic controller for the gas system, so that the supply does not run out during the night.
  • Only operate the gas system using propane gas.
  • Do not use the space behind the heater as a storage compartment.
  • Never operate catalytic ovens or infra-red gas radiators in the interior of the vehicle, since they consume oxygen for burning.
  • Lay the 240 V power cable in such a way that the cable cannot be frozen or be damaged (e.g. during snow removal).
  • When it is snowing heavily, clear the roof of the vehicle of snow regularly. A few centimetres of powdery snow serves as insulation, but wet snow quickly becomes a heavy burden.
  • Before embarking on the return journey, remove all the snow from the roof to avoid impeding vehicles behind you with a "snow flag".

17.10 Travel checklists

The following checklists will help that nothing important is left at home although not everything on the checklists might be necessary.

Dethleffs Motorhome Premium Class (2010) - Travel checklists - 1

Kitchen area

Do not leave checking of documents (e.g. vehicle papers and information) as well as checking the condition of the vehicle until just before commencing the trip. Planning and checking documents well in advance will save unnecessary trouble.

Object Object Object
Wiping cloth Cleansing agent(detergent)Salad servers
Mug Dishcloths Chopping board
Turnspit Set of knives and forks for grillingBowls
Can opener Coffeepot Brush to wash the dishes
Egg-cup Corkscrew Cloth to wash the dishes
Ice cube tray Kitchen paper Matches
Lighter Spoons Cups
Bottle openerKnifesPlates
Air-tight storage boxesGarbage bagsThermos jug
Breakfast plateFrying pans Pots
ForksStirring spoonsGlasses

Bathroom/sanitary items

TowelsSanitary itemsToilet brushToilet paperToothbrush glass

Living area

DustbinInsect lampRain clothes
Road atlasInsect repellentFirst aid kit
Bath towelsDeck of cardsTravel guides/parking guide
Bath shoesBroomRucksack
BatteriesCandles Sleeping bags
Bed sheetsDust panPencils and paper
Bed linenCoat-hangersShoes
Laundry bagClothes brush Shoe polish
BooksPillowVacuum cleaner
Camping guideMap Flash light
Spare bulbsMedicinePocket knife
Water bottleMusic cassettesTable cloth
BinocularsNeck-supporting pillowClothes pins
Fire extinguisherSewing kitClothesline
Gas bottle Radio

Vehicle/tools

ObjectObjectObject
Waste water con-tainerFabric tape Screwdriver
Adapter socket Watering can for drinking waterCurrent-measuring instrument
CEE adapter Cable reel Step
Wire V-belt Wheel chocks
Spare wheel Glue First-aid kit
Spare lamps Universal pliers Vehicle jack
Spare fuses Compressor Hazard warning tri-angle
Replacement wa-ter pumpLuster terminals Warning sign
HammerLoopsWarning vest
Flat wrenchTube adapterFlashing hazard warning light
Gas filling adapterHose clips
Gas tubeSnow chains (win-ter)

Outside

Stay ropeCamping tableLock
BellowsLuggage racksString
Camping chairsGrillTent pegs/tightening ropes

Documents

List of addressesRegistration bookIdentity card
Registration confirmation(s)Driving licencePassport
Allergy certificateGreen insurance cardWrit of protection
Instruction manualsVaccination certificateVignette/toll card
Instruction leaflets for medicinesCredit cardVisa

12 V fuses 120

For toilet 122

On the living area battery 121

On the starter battery 121

12 V main switch 114

12 V power supply 106

Switching on 114

Troubleshooting 186

240 V automatic circuit breaker ..... 122

240 V connection 60, 119

Power cable 119

Troubleshooting 185

240 V indicator lamp 114

240 V power supply 118

A

AC converter 109

Troubleshooting 187

Access ladder, overcab bed 89

Access ladder, pull-down bed 90

Accessories, fitting 20

Adapter cable 120

Additional equipment 28

Add-on parts see special equipment ..... 20

Air conditioning unit 139

Maintenance 169

Position 139

Remote control 139

Switching off 140

Switching on 140

Timer 140

Troubleshooting 187

Appliances.... 123

Manuals 20

Automatic power selection (AES) 134

Auxiliary charging unit 110

Position 110

Awning 60

Awning light, remote control 86

B

Basic equipment 27

Battery alarm 117

Battery monitor 112

Battery see starter battery and

living area battery 106

Battery selector switch 112

Battery separation 112

Battery voltage, displaying 115

Beds 88

Before the journey 25

Bike rack Load 33

Travelling with a loaded bike rack ..... 33

Blind, cleaning 158

Blind, driver's cabin Closing 75

Opening 75

Blind, skylight with snap latch Closing 77

Opening 77

Blind, window Closing 74

Opening 74

Boiler (Alde) Emptying 129

Safety instructions 129

Switching off 129

Switching on 129

Water, filling with 129

Bonnet Closing 52

Opening 52

Brakes 42

Check 43,183

Braking system, troubleshooting 183

Breakdown services in Europe 199

Bulbs, changing 171

Garage light 174

Halogen spotlight 171

Recessed halogen light 172, 173

Refrigerator light 175

Wardrobe light 174

Butane gas 23,96

C

Cable reel 119

Camping gas bottles, use 24, 97

Camping in winter 207

Canopy light, entrance step 86

Capacity of the battery 106

Caravan coupling 34

Care 155

Blind 158

Carpet 158

Curtains 158

Driver's cabin insulation mat 157

Electrical-hydraulic steady legs ..... 157

Entrance step 156

External care 155

Extractor hood 160

Furniture surfaces 157

Gas cooker 158

High-pressure cleaner, washing with ..... 155

Hot-water heater 168

In the winter 161

Insect screen 158

Interior care 157

Lamps 157

Net curtains 158

PVC-floor covering 158

Roman shade 158

Seat belt 158

Sink 158

Synthetic parts, interior 157

Teflon coverings 158

Temporary lay-up 162

Toilets 160

Underbody 156

Upholstery 157

Washing 155

Waste water tank 156

Water system 158

Windows 156

Winter lay-up 164

Carpet, cleaning 158

Central locking system, kitchen unit ..... 38

Locking 83

Unlocking 83

Central seating group

Extending 87, 88

Sleeping conversion 93, 94

Changing wheels 179

Checklist 39,162

Before the journey 39

For the journey 207

Initial start-up after temporary lay-up ..... 165

Road safety 39

Temporary lay-up 162

Winter lay-up 164

Children's beds 88, 90

Circulating pump, setting the

rotational speed 127

Cleaning Water pipes .... 159

Water tank 158

Cleaning see care ....155

Closed circuit current .....105

Condensation 70

On the double acrylic glass pane .....71

On the screwed connections in the floor . . . .70

Condensation water see condensation .....71

Connecting cable see power cable .....119

Conventional load .....27

Insect screen, closing .....66

Insect screen, opening 66

Roman shade, closing .....66

Roman shade, opening .....66

Window, closing .....66

Window, opening .....65

Conversion door, inside

Locking 65

Opening 65

Conversion door, outside

Locking 64

Opening 64

Cooker 130

Troubleshooting 189

Cooling water, refilling .....52

Curtains, cleaning .....158

D

Danger of suffocation .....20, 70

Dimensions, permissible .....201

Dishwasher....141

Switching off 142

Switching on ....141

Troubleshooting 192

Displays

Battery voltage 115

Electrical steady legs .....57

Electrical-hydraulic steady legs .....59

Temperature....118

Time 118

Waste water tank level .....117

Water tank level 117

Disposal

Household waste 16

Sewage....16

Waste water 16

Door lock 64

Doors

Conversion door 63

Lock 64

Troubleshooting 195

Double floor, load 33

Drain cock, waste water 148

Drain cock, water 147

Drain cocks 149, 150

Drain neck 147, 148

Drinking water 24

Drinking water filler neck 146

Closing 146

Opening 146

Driver's cabin insulation mat, care 157

Driver's cabin partition 69

Closing 69,70

Opening 69,70

Driver's seat 43

Armrest, adjustment 45

Backrest, adjustment 45

Cushioning, adjustment 45

Lumbar support, adjusting 45

Moving in lengthways direction ..... 44

Seat depth, adjustment 44

Seat heater, switching on 45

Seat height, adjustment 44

Seat inclination, adjustment 44

Turning it to driving position 44

Driving speed 42

Driving the motorhome 41

DuoControl switching facility 102

Duomatic switching facility 100

During the journey 41

E

Electrical steady legs 56

Displays.... 57

Remote control 57

Warning tone 57

Electrical system 105

240 V connection, troubleshooting ..... 185

Entrance step, troubleshooting ..... 185

Explanation of terms 105

Lighting, troubleshooting 185

Safety instructions 24

Troubleshooting 185

Electrical-hydraulic steady legs 58

Displays.... 59

Operation 59

Electrically adjustable external mirrors ..... 47

Entrance step 34,55

Care 156

Extending 35

Retracting 35

Troubleshooting 185

Warning tone 35

Environmental tips 16

Exterior lighting

Checking 39

Troubleshooting 185

External care 155

External connection see 240 V connection .... 60

External flaps 67

Flap lock 67, 68

Sliding drawer 33,69

External gas connection 99

External mirrors, electrically adjustable

Adjusting 47

Mirror heater, switching on 47

Extractor hood 133

Care 160

Filter, cleaning 160

F

Fault current protection switch ..... 119

Filling the tank 53

Fire

Behaviour in the event of 19

Extinguishing 19

Fire prevention 19

Fire risks, avoidance 19

Fixed bed 91

Closing 91

Opening 91

Fixed table

Moving in a crossways direction ..... 82

Moving in a lengthways direction ..... 82

Flap lock

Closing 68

Opening 67, 68

With recessed handle 67

With separate locking cylinder ..... 68

Flat screen 36

Flat screen, positioning 83, 84

Fluorescent tubes, changing 171

Room lamp 172

Folding mechanism, overcab bed 89

Forced ventilation 20,70

Freezer compartment door locking mechanism

Closing 138

Locking in the ventilation position ..... 138

Opening 138

Front passenger's seat 43

Armrest, adjustment 45

Backrest, adjustment 45

Cushioning, adjusting 45

Lumbar support, adjusting 45

Moving in lengthways direction ..... 44

Seat depth, adjustment 44

Seat heater, switching on 45

Seat height, adjustment 44

Seat inclination, adjustment ..... 44

Turning it to driving position 44

Fuel filler neck 53

Closing 54

Opening 54

Furniture flaps, troubleshooting 195

Furniture surfaces, cleaning ..... 157

Fuse box

see 240 V automatic circuit breaker ..... 122

Fuses

12 V fuses .... 120

240 V fuse 118, 122

For toilet 122

On the living area battery ..... 121

On the starter battery ..... 121

Fuses see 12 V fuses and 240 V fuse ..... 120

G

Garage light 174

Gas bottle compartment 23, 96

Gas bottles

Changing 97

Safety instructions 23, 96

Gas connection, external 99

Gas consumption 97

Gas cooker

Cleaning 158

Switching off 131

Switching on 131

Troubleshooting 189

Gas isolator taps 98

Symbols 98, 123

Gas odour 22, 95, 188

Gas oven 131

Switching off 132

Troubleshooting 189

Gas supply in European countries .....206

Gas system....95

Defect 22,95,188

General instructions .....22

Hose break guard .....98

Safety instructions .....22, 95

Switching automatics .....100, 102

Troubleshooting ....188

Gas tube, check .....23, 96

Gathered blind 73

General instructions .....16

Guarantee 7

Guarantee certificate 7

Guarantee conditions 7

H

Handbrake 55

Applying 20

Handling of tyres 179

Headrests 46

Heat exchanger (Alde)

Switching off 126

Switching on 126

Heat exchanger, heater, replacement .....123

Heater

Heat exchanger, replacement .....123

Initial start-up ....124

Troubleshooting .....189

Heater, external mirrors .....47

Heki skylight .....79

Closing 79

Insect screen 80

Opening 79

Roman shade 79

Ventilation position 79

Help on Europe's roads .....199

High rate of gas consumption ..... 22, 95, 188

High-pressure cleaner, washing with .....155

Hinged skylight 78

Closing 78

Insect screen 78

Locking in ventilation position .....78

Opening 78

Roman shade 78

Hinged window

Closing 71

Continuous ventilation 72

Opening 71

Hose break guard, gas system .....98

Hot-water heater

240 V electrical operation, selecting ..... 125

Adjustment menu 125

Auxiliary circulating pump 127

Care 168

Fluid level, checking 168

Gas and 240 V electrical operation, selecting .... 126

Gas operation, selecting 125

Heat exchanger 126

Heater, switching off 126

Heater, switching on 126

Heating fluid, topping up 169

Heating system, bleeding 169

Maintenance work 168

Operating unit 124

Rotational speed, circulating pump ..... 127

Safety instructions 124

Start screen 125

Tool menus 125

1

Independent vehicle heater

Maintenance 169

Programming 128

Switching off 128

Switching on 128

Indicator lamp, 240 V power supply ..... 114

Indicator lamp, dishwasher 141

Indicator lamp, toilet 152

Information stickers 176

Initial start-up

After temporary lay-up 165

After winter lay-up 165

Inner door, troubleshooting 195

Insect screen door

Closing 67

Opening 67

Insect screen, cleaning 158

Insect screen, Heki skylight

Closing 80

Opening 80

Insect screen, hinged skylight

Closing 78

Opening 78

Insect screen, window of conversion door

Closing 66

Opening 66

Insect screen, windows

Closing 74,75

Opening 74,75

Insect screen, wind-up skylight

Closing 80

Opening 80

Inspection records 9

Inspection work 167

Inspections 167

Inspection plan 12

Records 9

Interior care 157

Interior lighting 171

Bulbs, changing 171

Troubleshooting 185

K

Keys 25

Kitchen unit, central locking system ..... 38

L

Ladder, overcab bed 89

Ladder, pull-down bed 90

Ladder, rear 31

Lamps 84,171

Cleaning 157

Operating 84

Lay-up

Temporary 162

Winter lay-up 164

Leakage water inside the vehicle ..... 193

Light control 86

Troubleshooting 187

Light switch 85, 86

Lighting

Lamps, cleaning 157

Troubleshooting 185

Lights see bulbs, changing 171

Living area battery

Battery alarm 117

Charging 107

Discharging 107

Fuses 121

Instructions....106

Position 107

Troubleshooting 185, 187

Voltage, displaying 115

Load 29

Bike rack 33

Double floor 33

Rear garage 32

Rear storage space 32

Roof rack 31

Load rack for roof loads 31

Load see also payload 29

Driver's cabin partition 69

External flap 67, 68

Low beam 204

M

Maintenance work 167

Air conditioning unit 169

Electrical-hydraulic steady legs ..... 168

Hot-water heater 168

Independent vehicle heater 169

Mass in ready-to-drive condition .....27, 28

Maximum permissible gross weight ..... 26, 28

Microwave oven Switching off .... 133

Switching on 133

Troubleshooting 189

N

Net curtains, cleaning 158

No gas 188

Nose weight 34

0

Odour seal 149

Off-load voltage 105

Operating modes Refrigerator ....134, 137

Switching automatics, gas system .... 101, 103

Oven see gas cooker or gas oven ..... 130, 131

Overcab bed 88

Access ladder 89

Folding downwards 89

Folding mechanism 89

Folding upwards 89

Safety net 89

Overloading 29

P

Panel (MP 20-T) .....113

12 V main switch....114

240 V indicator lamp .....114

Alarms 117

Battery displays 115

Tank display .....117

Tank heater switch .....118

Temperature display .....118

Time display ....118

Payload....26

Calculation 28

Composition 27

Example calculation .....27, 29

Payload see also load .....26

Permissible gross weight see

maximum permissible gross weight .....26

Permitted mass 26

Personal equipment .....28

Plug-in light Plugging in ....85

Removing 85

Rotating 85

Pneumatic spring 48

Functions 50

Overheating protection .....48

Pressure, increasing .....48

Pressure, reducing .....48

Remote control 49

Safety instructions .....48, 49

Troubleshooting .....183, 184

Power cable for the 240 V connection .....119

Propane gas 23,96

Pull-down bed....89

Access ladder....90

Lifting 90

Lowering....90

Safety net 90

PVC-floor covering 36

PVC-floor covering, cleaning 158

R

Rear axle load 34

Rear garage 32

Rear ladder 31

Folding downwards ....32

Folding upwards ....32

Rear storage space 32

Recessed halogen light 172, 173

Refrigerator 134

Change-over between energy sources ... 135

Defrosting 137

Door lock 138

Frame heater 136

Operating modes 134, 137

Operation 136

Refrigerating temperature control ..... 135

Switching off 136, 137

Switching on 136, 137

Temperature, adjusting 137

Troubleshooting 190, 191

Ventilation grill, removal 134

Refrigerator door locking mechanism

Bringing into the ventilation position ..... 139

Closing 138, 139

Locking in the ventilation position ..... 138

Opening 138, 139

Refrigerator light 175

Refrigerator ventilation grill, removal ..... 134

Registration 25

Remote control, air conditioning unit ..... 139

Remote control, awning 61

Remote control, awning light 86

Remote control, canopy light 86

Remote control, electrical steady legs ..... 57

Remote control, entrance step 86

Remote control, pneumatic spring 49

Reversing camera 42

Risk of frost damage 24, 145, 150

Road safety 39

Checklist 39

Notes for 20

Roman shade, cleaning 158

Roman shade, driver's cabin

Closing 76

Opening 76

Roman shade, Heki skylight

Closing 79

Opening 80

Roman shade, hinged skylight

Closing 78

Opening 78

Roman shade, side pane 38

Roman shade, window of conversion door

Closing 66

Opening 66

Roman shade, windows

Closing 75

Opening 75

Roman shade, wind-up skylight

Closing 80

Opening 80

Roof load 31

Roof rack, load 31

Roof rail 31

Room lamp 172

S

Safety instructions 19

Cooker 130

Electrical system 24

Fire prevention 19

Gas bottles 96

Gas system 22,95

Hot-water heater 124

Road safety 20

Towing 22

Water system 24

Safety knob, hinged window 71

Safety net, overcab bed 89

Safety net, pull-down bed 90

Sanitary fittings 145

Seat belts 43

Cleaning 158

Fastening correctly 43

Seating arrangement 46

Seating groups 87

Seats, rotating 81

Serial number....176

Shower 151

Sink, cleaning 158

Skylight with snap latch 77

Blind 77

Closing 77

Opening 77

Skylights 76, 78

Sleeping conversion,

central seating group 92, 93, 94

Sliding drawer 33,69

Opening 69

Sliding window

Closing 73

Opening 72,73

Snow chains 39

Spare parts 175

Spare wheel 180

Spare wheel support 180

Special equipment 197

Description 15

Marking 15

Safety instructions .... 20

Weight details 197

Speed limits 201

Spotlight

Shifting 84

Swivelling 84

Starter battery

Battery alarm 117

Charging 107

Fuses 121

Troubleshooting 185

Voltage, displaying 115

Staying overnight

Away from camping areas 204

During travel 206

Steady legs

Extending 56

Retracting 56

Steady legs, electrical

Displays 57

Remote control 57

Warning tone 57

Steady legs, electrical-hydraulic

Care 157

Displays 59

Maintenance work 168

Operation 59

Troubleshooting 185

Sun visor

Extending 47

Retracting 47

Suspension table

Conversion to bed foundation 82

Table extension, folding ..... 81

Table surface, extending 82

Table surface, reducing size ..... 82

Switching automatics, gas system

Symbols

For instructions 15

Gas isolator taps 98, 123

Synthetic parts in the toilet and living areas,

cleaning 157

T

Table

ole 81

Table extension

Table surface, extending 82

Table surface, reducing size 82

Tank alarm 117

Tank heater, switching on and off .....118

Tank lid see fuel filler neck .53

Teflon coverings, cleaning .....158

Television 36,83

Positioning 84

Pulling out....83

Storing 36

Swiveling 83

Temperature display....118

Thetford cassette, retaining clip .....154

Time, displaying .....118

Tips....199

Toilet....151

Care 160

Flushing 152

Fuse 122

Indicator lamp 152

Instructions 151

Troubleshooting .....193

Toilet cassette

Emptying 154

Removing 153

Unlocking 153

Toilet compartment .....151

Ventilation....151

Toll regulations in European countries .....206

Total discharge 105

Towing 22

General instructions ....34

Safety instructions 22

Traffic rules in foreign countries .....199

Transformer/rectifier (EBL 220) .....110

Functions 111

Position....111

Travel checklists .....207

Travel cots suitable for children .....88, 90

Troubleshooting 183

12 V power supply .....186

240 V connection .....185

AC converter 187

Air conditioning unit 187

Battery 185

Body 195

Braking system 183

Cooker 189

Dishwasher 192

Electrical system....185

Electrical-hydraulic steady legs .....185

Entrance step 185

Extractor hood 187

Furniture flaps 195

Gas cooker 189

Gas oven 189

Gas system 188

Heater 189

Inner door 195

Light control 187

Lighting 185

Living area battery 185

Microwave oven 189

Pneumatic spring 183, 184

Refrigerator 190, 191

Starter battery 185

Toilet 193

Vacuum toilet 194

Water supply 193

TV cabinet 83

Tyre change see changing wheels ..... 179

Tyre specifications 179

Tyres 177

Excessive wear ..... 21, 39, 177, 181

General instructions 177

Handling 179

Identification 179

Load-carrying capacity 180

Tyre pressure 181

Tyre selection 178

U

Underbody, maintenance 156

Unladen weight 27

Upholstery, cleaning 157

V

Vacuum cleaner 142

Blow-out filter, changing 171

Dust bag, changing 143

Filter, changing 170

Hose, connecting 143

Intake opening, activating 143

Motor filter, changing 170

Switching off 143

Vacuum toilet

Flushing 153

Indicator lamps 153

Putting into operation 153

Troubleshooting 194

Valve, emptying 161

Vehicle identification plate 176

Vehicle manuals and documents ..... 15

Vehicle, washing 155

Ventilation 70

Toilet compartment 151

Volume of waste water, displaying ..... 117

Volume of water, displaying ..... 117

W

Wardrobe light 174

Warning stickers 176

Warning tone, electrical steady legs ..... 57

Washer fluid, filling 52

Washing with a high-pressure cleaner ..... 155

Waste water tank 148

Care 156

Cleaning 156

Emptying 148

Filling level, displaying 117

Troubleshooting 193

Water drainage 147

Water pipes, cleaning 159

Water pump 145, 149

Water supply

General 145

Troubleshooting 193

Water system

Care 158

Cleaning 158

Disinfect 159

Drinking water filler neck 146

Emptying 150

Filling 149

Safety instructions 24

Water tank

Cleaning 158

Filling level, displaying 117

Water drainage 147

Water,draining....147

Water, filling with 147

Water tank see also water system ..... 146

Weatherproof guarantee

Conditions 7

Inspection 9

Inspection plan 12

Inspection stamp 9

Weight details for special equipment ..... 197

Wheel chocks 55

Wheel rim size 180

Wheel rim type 177

Wheels 177

Window, conversion door

Closing 66

Insect screen, closing 66

Insect screen, opening 66

Opening 65

Roman shade, closing 66

Roman shade, opening 66

Windows 70

Blind 73,75

Cleaning 156

Gathered blind 73

Insect screen 73, 74

Roman shade 74, 76

Wind-up skylight....80

Closing 80

Insect screen 80

Opening 80

Roman shade 80

Troubleshooting 195

Winter care....161

Winter operation 162

Table of contents Click a title to access it
Manual assistant
Powered by Anthropic
Waiting for your message
Product information

Brand : Dethleffs

Model : Motorhome Premium Class (2010)

Category : Motorhome